250
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System V100R003C03 Commissioning Guide (U2000) Issue 01 Date 2011-10-30 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

  • Upload
    andias3

  • View
    3.276

  • Download
    45

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemV100R003C03

Commissioning Guide (U2000)

Issue 01

Date 2011-10-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Page 2: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

Page 3: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

About This Document

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 950 V100R003C03

iManager U2000 V100R006C00

Intended AudienceThis document describes how to commission the OptiX RTN 950, including preparations beforecommissioning, site commissioning, and system commissioning.

The intended audience of this document are:

Installation and commissioning engineers

Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,which if not avoided, will result in death orserious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low levelof risk, which if not avoided, could result inminor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,which if not avoided, could result inequipment damage, data loss, performancedegradation, or unexpected results.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) About This Document

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

Page 4: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Symbol Description

Indicates a tip that may help you solve aproblem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasizeor supplement important points of the maintext.

General ConventionsThe general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command ConventionsThe command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) About This Document

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

Page 5: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

GUI ConventionsThe GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change HistoryUpdates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue containsall updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03This document is the first release of the V100R003C03 version.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) About This Document

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

Page 6: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Safety Precautions.........................................................................................................................11.1 General Safety Precautions.................................................................................................................................21.2 Warning and Safety Symbols.............................................................................................................................31.3 Electrical Safety..................................................................................................................................................41.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.........................................................................................................................71.5 Storage Batteries.................................................................................................................................................71.6 Radiation.............................................................................................................................................................9

1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers.....................................................................................................................91.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure.......................................................................................................................111.6.3 Forbidden Areas......................................................................................................................................111.6.4 Laser........................................................................................................................................................111.6.5 Microwave...............................................................................................................................................12

1.7 Working at Heights...........................................................................................................................................131.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects...........................................................................................................................131.7.2 Using Ladders..........................................................................................................................................14

1.8 Mechanical Safety............................................................................................................................................161.9 Other Precautions.............................................................................................................................................17

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations...........................................................................................192.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.................................................................................................202.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper...................................................................................................................222.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable.....................................................................................................................232.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board.....................................................................................................................24

3 Commissioning Preparations....................................................................................................263.1 Commissioning Process....................................................................................................................................27

3.1.1 Site Commissioning Process...................................................................................................................273.1.2 System Commissioning Process..............................................................................................................29

3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method........................................................................................................303.3 Preparing Documents and Tools.......................................................................................................................313.4 Checking Commissioning Conditions..............................................................................................................33

3.4.1 Site Commissioning.................................................................................................................................333.4.2 System Commissioning...........................................................................................................................33

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) Contents

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

Page 7: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

4 Site Commissioning....................................................................................................................344.1 Powering On the Equipment.............................................................................................................................354.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT......................................................................37

4.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU......................................................................................................464.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.............................................................................................484.2.3 Logging In to an NE................................................................................................................................514.2.4 Changing the NE ID................................................................................................................................524.2.5 Changing the NE Name...........................................................................................................................534.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters..................................................................................................544.2.7 Configuring Logical Boards....................................................................................................................554.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group......................................................................................................564.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link...........................................................................584.2.10 Creating an XPIC Workgroup...............................................................................................................594.2.11 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup.................................................................604.2.12 Synchronizing NE Time........................................................................................................................614.2.13 Configuring the Orderwire....................................................................................................................624.2.14 Checking Alarms...................................................................................................................................63

4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Handheld Tool..............................................................644.3.1 Connecting the Handheld Tool to the IDU..............................................................................................644.3.2 Setting NE Attributes...............................................................................................................................664.3.3 Configuring a Radio Link........................................................................................................................684.3.4 Checking Alarms.....................................................................................................................................72

4.4 Testing Connectivity of Cables........................................................................................................................734.4.1 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Web LCT...................................................................734.4.2 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Handheld Tool...........................................................744.4.3 Testing Connectivity of Network Cables................................................................................................764.4.4 Checking Fiber Jumper Connection........................................................................................................77

4.5 Aligning the Antennas......................................................................................................................................794.5.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes......................................................................................................................794.5.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas.......................................................................................................824.5.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas..........................................................................................................85

4.6 Checking the Status of Radio Links.................................................................................................................884.7 Querying the DCN Status.................................................................................................................................89

5 System Commissioning..............................................................................................................905.1 Configuring Networkwide Service Data..........................................................................................................92

5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.............................................................................................925.1.2 Changing the NE ID................................................................................................................................945.1.3 Changing the NE Name...........................................................................................................................955.1.4 Setting NE Communication Parameters..................................................................................................955.1.5 Configuring the Logical Board................................................................................................................965.1.6 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group......................................................................................................975.1.7 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link...........................................................................99

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) Contents

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

Page 8: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

5.1.8 Configuring ATPC Attributes...............................................................................................................1015.1.9 Synchronizing the NE Time..................................................................................................................1025.1.10 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services................................................................1055.1.11 Configuring the Clock Sources............................................................................................................1065.1.12 Configuring Orderwire........................................................................................................................107

5.2 Testing E1 Services........................................................................................................................................1085.2.1 Testing E1 Services by Using a BER Tester.........................................................................................1085.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS..........................................................................................................110

5.3 Testing Ethernet Services...............................................................................................................................1115.4 Testing ATM Services....................................................................................................................................1155.5 Testing AM Switching....................................................................................................................................118

5.5.1 Testing AM Switching by Using a BER Tester....................................................................................1185.5.2 Testing AM Switching Without a BER Tester......................................................................................120

5.6 Testing Protection Switching..........................................................................................................................1225.6.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching......................................................................................................................1225.6.2 Testing N+1 Protection Switching........................................................................................................1255.6.3 Testing SNCP Switching.......................................................................................................................1285.6.4 Testing ERPS Switching.......................................................................................................................1325.6.5 Testing MPLS APS Protection Switching.............................................................................................1335.6.6 Testing Linear MSP Switching..............................................................................................................136

5.7 Checking the Clock Status..............................................................................................................................1405.8 Testing the FM over a Radio Link..................................................................................................................1405.9 Testing 24-Hour BER.....................................................................................................................................144

6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool........................................................................................1476.1 Functions and Features...................................................................................................................................1486.2 Operation Interface.........................................................................................................................................148

7 Configuration Example of Service Data................................................................................1507.1 Networking Diagram......................................................................................................................................1517.2 Board Configurations.....................................................................................................................................1517.3 Service Planning.............................................................................................................................................1527.4 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................................154

A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................158A.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching...........................................................................................................160A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE.........................................................................................................164A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change...................................................................................164A.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs....................................................................................165A.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting....................................................................166A.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation....................................................168A.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC.......................................................................................173A.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1 Protection....................................................................180A.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.........................................................................................183

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) Contents

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

Page 9: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

A.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration.............................................................................186A.11 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute.................................................................................196A.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.....................................................................................198A.13 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation...................................................................201A.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table..................................................................................204A.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General................................................................................................205A.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced.............................................................................................207

B Glossary......................................................................................................................................209B.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................210B.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................210B.3 F-J..................................................................................................................................................................219B.4 K-O................................................................................................................................................................224B.5 P-T..................................................................................................................................................................230B.6 U-Z.................................................................................................................................................................239

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) Contents

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

Page 10: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

1 Safety Precautions

About This Chapter

This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing, operating, andmaintaining Huawei devices.

1.1 General Safety PrecautionsThis topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuringand testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.

1.2 Warning and Safety SymbolsBefore using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.

1.3 Electrical SafetyThis topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current,power cables, fuses, and ESD.

1.4 Environment of Flammable GasThis topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.

1.5 Storage BatteriesThis topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.

1.6 RadiationThis topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.

1.7 Working at HeightsThis topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.

1.8 Mechanical SafetyThis topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans,and carrying heavy objects.

1.9 Other PrecautionsThis topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables,and routing cables.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1

Page 11: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

1.1 General Safety PrecautionsThis topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuringand testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.

All Safety PrecautionsTo ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safetyprecautions in this document when installing, operating, and maintaining a device.

The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all thesafety precautions that must be followed. They are supplements to the safety precautions.

Local Laws and RegulationsWhen operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safetyprecautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws andregulations.

Basic Installation RequirementsThe installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training andbe familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation.

l Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a device.l Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot

and maintain the device.l Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or

change the device or parts of the device (including software).l The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety

problems to the person in charge.

Grounding RequirementsThe grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded.

l When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removingthe device, always disconnect the grounding facilities last.

l Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact.l Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor.l The device must be connected to the PGND permanently. Before operating the device,

check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that the device is properlygrounded.

Human Safetyl When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the

cables.l When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the

fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2

Page 12: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTEThe preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.

l To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits totelephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits.

l Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be hurtby laser beams.

l Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wriststrap. In addition, you need to get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches,to prevent electric shock and burn.

l In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press thefire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning buildingagain in any situation.

Device Safetyl Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as

on a wall or in a rack.l When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked.l When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required.l After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.

1.2 Warning and Safety SymbolsBefore using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.

Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950 and their meanings.

Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950

Symbol Indication

This symbol is for ESD protection.A notice with this symbol indicates that you should wearan ES wrist strap or glove when you touch a board.Otherwise, you may cause damage to the board.

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

LASERRADIATION

DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLYWITH OPTICALINSTRUMENTS

CLASS 1M LASERPRODUCT

This symbol is for the laser class.A notice with this symbol indicates the class of the laser.Avoid direct exposure to the laser beams. Otherwise, it maydamage you eyes or skin.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3

Page 13: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Symbol Indication

A notice with this symbol indicates where the subrack isgrounded.

ATTENTION 警告

CLEAN PERIODICALLY定期清洗

A notice with this symbol indicates that the air filter shouldbe cleaned periodically.

严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片

DON'T TOUCH THEFAN LEAVES BEFORETHEY SLOW DOWN !

This symbol is for fan safety.A notice with this symbol indicates that the fan leavesshould not be touched when the fan is rotating.

1.3 Electrical SafetyThis topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current,power cables, fuses, and ESD.

High Voltage

DANGERl A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact

with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal.l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock, or

both.

ThunderstormThe requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.

DANGERDo not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy weatherconditions.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4

Page 14: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

High Leakage Current

WARNINGBefore powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the devicecannot be ensured.

If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you mustconnect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/Cinput power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device.

Power Cables

DANGERDo not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core ofthe power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire oreye injury.

l Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device.

l Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable iscorrect.

Device with Power On

DANGERInstalling or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.

DANGERDo not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on.

Short Circuits

When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments inaccordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5

Page 15: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

CAUTIONTo avoid short-circuits when using a tool (such as a screwdriver), do not place the tool on theventilation plate of the subrack.

CAUTIONPrevent any screws from dropping into the subrack or chassis to avoid short-circuits.

Fuse

WARNINGIf the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications toensure safe operation of the device.

Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTIONThe static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitivecomponents on the board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI).

l The human body can generate static electromagnetic fields in the following situations:physical movement, clothing friction, friction between shoes and the ground, plastics inthe hand. Such static electromagnetic effects can remain for an appreciable time.

l Before operating a device, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear an ESD wrist strap that is properlygrounded. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitive components frombeing damaged by the static electricity in the human body.

Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6

Page 16: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

1.4 Environment of Flammable GasThis topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.

DANGERDo not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas.

Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.

1.5 Storage BatteriesThis topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.

DANGERBefore operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiarwith the method of connecting a storage battery.

l Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any short-circuit, and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage.

l If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte maycorrode metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards.

l A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit,which leads to human injuries.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7

Page 17: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Basic Precautions

To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery:

l Use special insulation tools.l Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures.l Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing

electrolyte.l When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or

reversing the storage battery is prohibited.l Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is

disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.

Short-Circuit

DANGERA battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary batteryis low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy.

Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the workingbattery before performing other operations.

Hazardous Gas

CAUTIONDo not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix itproperly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or deviceerosion.

Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofingmeasures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.

Battery Temperature

CAUTIONIf a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte mayoverflow.

When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60°C, you need to check whether theelectrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows, take appropriate measures immediately.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8

Page 18: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Battery Leakage

CAUTIONIn the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately.

When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. Whenyou find the electrolyte leaks, you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb theleaking electrolyte:

l Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3)

l Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3)

In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended bythe battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal.

If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyteimmediately by using water. In case of a severe situation, the person must be sent to a hospitalimmediately.

1.6 RadiationThis topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.

1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical FibersThe laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when usingoptical fibers.

DANGERWhen installing or maintaining an optical interface board or optical fibers, avoid direct eyeexposure to the laser beams launched from the optical interface board or fiber connectors. Thelaser beam can cause damage to your eyes.

Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces

CAUTIONIf fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriouslyaffected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned beforethe fiber is led into the equipment through the ODF for being inserted into an optical interfaceon the equipment.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9

Page 19: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the followingspecial cleaning tools and materials:

l Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can alsobe used. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin.

l Non-woven lens tissue

l Special compressed gas

l Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton)

l Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent

l Special magnifier for fiber connectors

For cleaning steps, see Task Collection "Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters" in the OptiXRTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance and Troubleshooting.

Replacing Optical Fibers

When replacing an optical fiber, cover the fiber connector of the unused optical fiber with aprotective cap.

Connecting Optical Fibersl Use an attenuator if the optical power is excessively high. A high received optical power

damages the optical interface.

l Directly connect an attenuator to a slanting optical interface. Install the attenuator on theIN port instead of the OUT port.

l Do not directly connect an attenuator to the level optical interface. Use the opticaldistribution frame (ODF) to connect an attenuator to a level optical interface.

Figure 1-2 shows a slanting optical interface, and Figure 1-3 shows a level optical interface.

Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface

Slanting opticalinterface

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

Page 20: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Figure 1-3 Level optical interface

Level opticalinterface

1.6.2 Electromagnetic ExposureThis topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure.

If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmitdirections of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.

CAUTIONEnsure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.

1.6.3 Forbidden AreasThe topic describes requirements for a forbidden area.

l Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range,the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction.

l A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbiddenarea.

1.6.4 LaserThis topic describes safety precautions for lasers.

WARNINGWhen handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directlywithout eye protection.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

Page 21: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The lasertransmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, and therefore it hasvery high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters eyes, theeyes may be damaged.

In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eyeprotection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur,however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to viewan un-terminated optical fiber.

Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers

To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions:

l All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed therequired training courses.

l Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.

l Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.

l Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not surewhether the optical source is switched off.

l Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical sourceis switched off.

l Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are notexposed to laser radiation.

l Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe toview the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.

Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling

Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers:

l Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers.

l Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the opticalsource. After disconnecting the fiber, cap to the fiber connectors.

1.6.5 MicrowaveWhen installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions ofmicrowave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.

WARNINGStrong radio frequency can harm the human body.

When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multipleaerials, switch off the transmitter in advance.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

Page 22: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

1.7 Working at HeightsThis topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.

WARNINGWhen working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down.

The requirements for working at heights are as follows:

l The personnel who work at heights must be trained.l Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling

down.l Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken.l Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas.l Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are

intact.

1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy ObjectsThis topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow wheninstalling, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices.

WARNINGWhen heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects.

l Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations.l Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good

condition.l Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or

wall with good weight-bearing capacity.l Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations.l Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the

lifting, as shown in Figure 1-4.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

Page 23: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects

1.7.2 Using LaddersThis topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

Checking Laddersl Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the ladder

is in good condition, you can use the ladder.l Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid

overweighing the ladder.

Placing LaddersThe proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the ladderwith an angle square or your arms, as shown in Figure 1-5. When using a ladder, to prevent theladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take protectionmeasures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

Page 24: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder

Climbing Up a Ladder

When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points:

l Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the twolong sides.

l Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks.l Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).

If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than theroof, as shown in Figure 1-6.

Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

Page 25: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

1.8 Mechanical SafetyThis topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans,and carrying heavy objects.

Drilling Holes

WARNINGDo not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complyingwith the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet anddamages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter thecabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited.

l Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet.

l Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured bythe splashing metal scraps.

l Wear protection gloves when drilling holes.

l Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling,clean up the metallic scraps.

Sharp Objects

WARNINGWear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injuredby the sharp edges of the device.

Fansl When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This

is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans, which damages the fans or device.

l When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operatingfans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the boardsare damaged.

Carrying Heavy Objects

Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being hurt.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

Page 26: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

WARNINGl The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent

the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects.l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on

the cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, whichmay hurt you.

l Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one personcarries a heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs andmove stably to avoid being strained.

l When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not holdthe handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules,and boards.

1.9 Other PrecautionsThis topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables,and routing cables.

Removing and Inserting a Board

CAUTIONWhen inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently toavoid distorting pins on the backplane.

l Slide the board along the guide rails.l Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage.l When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors,

or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body tothe electrostatic-sensitive components.

Binding Signal Cables

CAUTIONBind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.

Routing CablesIn the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skinof the cables. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

Page 27: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

l When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0°C.l If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0°C, transfer

them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours beforeinstallation.

l Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not performany improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.

High Temperature

WARNINGIf the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the

flag may exceed 70°C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment,you must wear the protection gloves.

IF Cables

WARNINGBefore installing or removing an IF cable, you must turn off the power switch of the IF board.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

Page 28: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

About This Chapter

This chapter provides notices for the operations that may cause bodily injury or equipmentdamage if they are not performed properly during the commissioning and maintenance ofmicrowave equipment.

2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever SwitchThe ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and offas per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.

2.2 Operation Guide for the IF JumperBefore removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injuryor damage to the IF board and ODU.

2.3 Operation Guide for the IF CableBefore removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injuryor damage to the IF board and ODU.

2.4 Operation Guide for the IF BoardBefore removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injuryor damage to the IF board and ODU.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

Page 29: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever SwitchThe ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and offas per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.

Position and Description of the Toggle Lever SwitchThe toggle lever switch is located on the IF board and controls the power that is fed to the ODU,as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch

I : ON

O: OFF

Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch out.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

Page 30: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

2. Turn it to the left.

3. Release the toggle lever switch.

Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

Page 31: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

2. Turn it to the right.

3. Release the toggle lever switch.

2.2 Operation Guide for the IF JumperBefore removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injuryor damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure

Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for theToggle Lever Switch.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

Page 32: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

21

DANGEREnsure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF jumper.

Step 2 Remove or install the IF jumper.

----End

2.3 Operation Guide for the IF CableBefore removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injuryor damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure

Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for theToggle Lever Switch.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

Page 33: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

21

DANGEREnsure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF cable.

Step 2 Install or remove the IF cable.

----End

2.4 Operation Guide for the IF BoardBefore removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injuryor damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure

Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for theToggle Lever Switch.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

Page 34: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

321

3

DANGEREnsure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF board.

Step 2 Disconnect the IF jumper or IF cable.

Step 3 Remove or install the IF board.

----End

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

Page 35: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

3 Commissioning Preparations

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the preparations that need to be made prior to commissioning equipment.

3.1 Commissioning ProcessBased on the objects to be commissioned, the process can be divided into two stages: sitecommissioning and system commissioning.

3.2 Determining the Commissioning MethodBy using the U2000 for commissioning, engineers can adopt the network commissioningmethod.

3.3 Preparing Documents and ToolsThis section lists the document and tools that should be prepared prior to commissioning theequipment.

3.4 Checking Commissioning ConditionsEnsure that the equipment meets the commissioning requirements for the site or system prior toperforming such tasks. The following sections provide a non-exhaustive checklist for bothscenarios.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

Page 36: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

3.1 Commissioning ProcessBased on the objects to be commissioned, the process can be divided into two stages: sitecommissioning and system commissioning.

3.1.1 Site Commissioning ProcessSite commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both endsof a radio link. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the radio link between the siteswork properly, and is also performed in preparation of system commissioning.

You can use the following methods to configure site commissioning data for the OptiX RTN950 on site:l Web LCTl Handheld tool

NOTE

You can commission only basic items by using the handheld tool.

Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using theWeb LCT)

Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT on sitewhen they are:l Familiar with how to configure radio link data on the OptiX RTN 950.l Aware of the radio link data plan for the site.l Equipped with a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed.

Table 3-1 Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT

Commissioning Item Remarks

Powering On the Equipment Required

Configuring SiteCommissioning Data byUsing the Web LCT

Connecting the Web LCT Required

Creating NEs by Using theSearch Method

Required

Log in to an NE Required

Changing the NE ID Required

Changing the Name of anNE

Optional

Setting the CommunicationParameters of an NE

Required

Configuring LogicalBoards

Required

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

Page 37: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Commissioning Item Remarks

Configuring IF 1+1protection

Optional

Configuring IF/ODUInformation for a RadioLink

Required

Synchronizing NE Time Required

Configuring Orderwire Optional

Checking Alarms Required

Testing Connectivity ofCables

Testing Connectivity of E1Cables (by Using the WebLCT)

Required when E1 cables areused on the site

Testing Connectivity ofNetwork Cables

Required when networkcables are used on the site

Testing Connectivity ofOptical Fibers

Required when optical fibersare used on the site

Aligning Antennasa Aligning Single-PolarizedAntennas

Required when microwaveservices are transmitted bysingle-polarized antennas

Aligning Dual-PolarizedAntennas

Required when microwaveservices are transmitted bydual-polarized antennas

Querying the Status of Radio Links Required

Querying the DCN Status Required

NOTE

a: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on both ends of theradio link.

Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using theHandheld Tool)

Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using the handheld tool onsite when they are:l Familiar with how to configure radio link data on the OptiX RTN 950.l Aware of the radio link data plan for the site.l Equipped with the handheld tool.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

Page 38: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Table 3-2 Configuring site commissioning data by using the handheld tool

Commissioning Item Remarks

Powering On the Equipment Required

Configuring SiteCommissioning Data byUsing the Handheld Tool

Connecting the HandheldTool to the IDU

Required

Setting NE Attributes Required

Configuring a Radio Link Required

Checking Alarms Required

Testing Connectivity ofCables

Testing Connectivity of E1Cables by Using theHandheld Tool

Required when E1 cables areused on the site

Testing Connectivity ofNetwork Cables

Required when networkcables are used on the site

Testing Connectivity ofOptical Fibers

Required when optical fibersare used on the site

Aligning the Antennasa Aligning Single-PolarizedAntennas

Required when microwaveservices are transmitted bysingle-polarized antennas

Aligning Dual-PolarizedAntennas

Required when microwaveservices are transmitted bydual-polarized antennas

NOTE

a: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on both ends of theradio link.

3.1.2 System Commissioning ProcessSystem commissioning refers to commissioning for the entire microwave transmission network.System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and protectionfunctions are implemented over the microwave transmission network.

Table 3-3 System commissioning process

Commissioning Item Remarks

Configuring Network-wide Service Data Required

Testing E1 Services Testing E1 Servicesby Using a BERTester

Required when E1 service are available anda BER tester is available on site

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

Page 39: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Commissioning Item Remarks

Testing E1 ServicesThrough PRBS

Required when E1 services are available andno BER tester is available on site

Testing Ethernet Services Required when Ethernet services areavailable

Testing ATM Services Required when ATM services are available

Testing AMSwitching

Testing AMSwitching by Usinga BER Tester

Required when the AM function is enabledand a BER tester is available on site

Testing AMSwitching Withouta BER Tester

Required when the AM function is enabledand no BER tester is available on site

Testing ProtectionSwitching

Testing IF 1+1Switching

Required when the radio links are configuredwith the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD

Testing N+1ProtectionSwitching

Required when the N+1 protection isconfigured

Testing SNCPSwitching

Required when the SNCP is configured

Testing ERPSSwitching

Required when ERPS is configured

Testing MPLS APSProtectionSwitching

Required when MPLS APS protection isconfigured

Testing Linear MSPSwitching

Required when 1+1/1:N linear MSP isconfigured

Checking the Clock Status Required

Testing 24-Hour BER Required when E1 services are available

3.2 Determining the Commissioning MethodBy using the U2000 for commissioning, engineers can adopt the network commissioningmethod.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

Page 40: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

In the following instructions for both types of commissioning methods, site commissioning and systemcommissioning are defined as follows:

l Site commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both ends of theradio link by connecting the commissioning tool to the NE at a single site.

l System commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on all the NEs in the network byconnecting the commissioning tool to a gateway NE where it configures the commissioning data foreach site.

Single-hop CommissioningThe single-hop commissioning method is preferred for small-scale microwave transmissionnetworks (for example, a network with only one or two radio link hops). By performing single-hop commissioning, you can complete all site and system commissioning items at a time. Themajor commissioning steps are as follows:

1. On both ends of a radio link, power on the NEs.2. Use the Web LCT to configure all service data on the NEs.3. Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items.4. Use the Web LCT to complete the system commissioning items.

NOTE

The Web LCT is used for single-hop commissioning, and therefore this document does not detail how to usethe Web LCT. For details about how to use the Web LCT, see the commissioning guide in the documentationpackage of the Web LCT version.

Network CommissioningThe network commissioning method is usually used for large-scale microwave transmissionnetworks. The major commissioning steps are as follows:

1. On both ends of a radio link, power on the NEs.2. Configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT or configure site

commissioning data by using the handheld tool.3. Use the U2000 to complete the site commissioning items at sites where services converge.4. Use the U2000 to complete the system commissioning items at sites where services

converge.

3.3 Preparing Documents and ToolsThis section lists the document and tools that should be prepared prior to commissioning theequipment.

DocumentsThe following document should be available before commissioning the equipment:

l Engineering design documents, including:– Network plan– Engineering design

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

Page 41: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

l Commissioning guides, including:– OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide– OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Configuration Guide

ToolsTable 3-4 lists the tools required for the commissioning task.

Table 3-4 Tools and meters

Tool and Meter Application Scenario

l Adjustable wrenchl Screwdriverl Telescopel Interphonel Hex keyl Multimeter that has a test cable with a

BNC connector at one endl North-stabilized indicator

Aligning antennas

Laptop on which the Web LCT is installed l Configuring site commissioning data byusing the Web LCT

l Testing connectivity of E1 cablesl Querying the DCN status

Handheld tool l Configuring site commissioning datal Testing connectivity of E1 cables

BER tester l Testing connectivity of E1 cablesl Testing E1 servicesl Testing AM switchingl Testing IF 1+1 switchingl Testing N+1 protection switchingl Testing SNCP switchingl Testing linear MSP switchingl Testing 24-hour BER

Network cable tester Testing connectivity of network cables

l Optical power meterl Short fiber jumper

Checking connectivity of optical fibers

PC on which the U2000 is installed Commissioning system items

E1 jumper Testing 24-hour BER

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

Page 42: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

For details about the requirements and methods for installing the Web LCT, see the iManager U2000 WebLCT User Guide.

3.4 Checking Commissioning ConditionsEnsure that the equipment meets the commissioning requirements for the site or system prior toperforming such tasks. The following sections provide a non-exhaustive checklist for bothscenarios.

3.4.1 Site CommissioningEnsure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for site commissioning.

Details about these requirements are as follows:

l Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.l Power is available to the equipment.l The service signal cables that are connected to other equipment have been properly routed.l The appropriate risk control measures to arrest falling objects and ensure personnel safety

are in place. Engineers are certified to commission the antennas.l There is no adverse weather (such as wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could hinder or impact

the commissioning.

3.4.2 System CommissioningEnsure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for system commissioning.

Details about these requirements are as follows:

l Site commissioning at both ends of a radio link has been completed.l There is no adverse weather (such as wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could hinder or impact

the commissioning.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

Page 43: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

4 Site Commissioning

About This Chapter

Site commissioning includes the specific commissioning processes for all site commissioningitems.

4.1 Powering On the EquipmentBy checking the power-on process of equipment, you can verify whether the hardware systemof the equipment and the power system are functioning properly.

4.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCTThis topic describes how to configure site commissioning data when using the Web LCT toperform site commissioning.

4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Handheld ToolThis section describes how to configure site commissioning data by using the handheld tool.

4.4 Testing Connectivity of CablesDuring the installation of the OptiX RTN 900, the cables may be connected to service interfacesincorrectly, or the hardware may malfunction. To ensure that the services run properly, testconnectivity of the cables.

4.5 Aligning the AntennasAligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning. The alignment hasa direct effect on the performance of the radio links.

4.6 Checking the Status of Radio LinksAfter aligning the antennas, query the status of radio links and determine whether the radio linksare in the normal state.

4.7 Querying the DCN StatusThe NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. By querying the radio links using the SearchFor Opposite NE, you can determine whether the DCN of the radio links runs properly.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

Page 44: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

4.1 Powering On the EquipmentBy checking the power-on process of equipment, you can verify whether the hardware systemof the equipment and the power system are functioning properly.

Prerequisitel Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.

l The power system is available. The voltage, pole connection, and fuse current of the powersystem have been checked in the process of connecting power cables.

l The power supply (for example, the power box of the cabinet) has been turned off.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

None.

Contextl For the OptiX RTN 950, the recommended fuse currents are listed in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Fuse currents

Chassis Fuse Current

OptiX RTN 950 ≥ 20 A

l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the following system control, switching, and timing board:

Chassis Board Type

OptiX RTN 950 CSH/CST

Precautions

CAUTIONl If the equipment is configured with two PIU boards, the nominal voltage for the input power

of each PIU board must be the same.

l The ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board is designed with a locking device.Hence, you must pull out the switches lightly before you turn it. If the switch points to "O",the switch is turned off. If the switch points to "I", the switch is turned on.

l If the output voltage of the power supply does not meet test requirements, do not power onthe cabinet. First, reconstruct the power supply and then test the output voltage again.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

Page 45: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Procedure

Step 1 Verify that the power cables of the chassis are correctly connected. Then, power on the equipmentand check the status of the indicators. In normal conditions, the PIU and FAN indicators aresteady green, as shown in Figure 4-1. Table 4-2 provides the descriptions for the different statesof the indicators.

Table 4-2 Status of indicators

Indicator State Description

PWR Steady green Indicates that the power supply is inthe normal state.

Off Indicates a power failure.

FAN Steady green Indicates that the fan is runningproperly.

Steady red Indicates that the fan is faulty.

Off Indicates that the fan is powered off.

Figure 4-1 Normal state

PIU indicator FAN indicator

Step 2 Check the status of the indicators on the system control, switching, and timing board and ensurethat the equipment is powered on. The board indicators should conform to the following statesand sequences.1. The PROG indicator should be green, off, blinking green, and off. The process lasts about

1 minute if service data is not configured.

NOTE

This process lasts longer if service data is configured.

2. The STAT and SYNC indicators should be green.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

Page 46: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Figure 4-2 Normal state

STAT

PROG

SYNC

ACTX ACTC

NOTE

l For detailed meanings of the indicators, see the IDU hardware description.

l For a board other than the system control, switching, and timing board on the IDU, the STAT indicator ison only after the corresponding logical board is added.

Step 3 Turn the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board to "I".

NOTE

l The ODU indicator on an IF board is green only after the logical board of the IF board connected tothe ODU and the logical board of the ODU are created.

l In the event of indicator abnormalities, contact Huawei technical support.

----End

4.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using theWeb LCT

This topic describes how to configure site commissioning data when using the Web LCT toperform site commissioning.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

Page 47: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Configuration ProcessFigure 4-3 describes the process of configuring site commissioning data.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

Page 48: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Figure 4-3 Configuration flowchart

Procedure for configuring an radio link (XPIC disabled)

End

Mandatory

Optional

Start

Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU

Synchronizing NE time

Creating an IF 1+1 protection group

Procedure for configuring an radio link (XPIC enabled)

Creating an XPIC group

Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link

Creating an IF 1+1 protection group

Setting the AM attributes of the XPIC hybrid radio link

EndConfiguring the IF/ODU

information of a radio link

Checking alarms

Checking alarms

Creating NEs

Logging in to NEs

Changing NE IDs

Configuring logical boards

Setting NE communication parameters

Changing NE names

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

Page 49: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

In TDM microwave mode, the AM attributes do not need to be configured for the links where the XPIC functionis enabled.

Procedure for Configuring NE Data

Table 4-3 Procedure for configuring NE data

Step Action Description

1 Connecting the Web LCT tothe IDU

Mandatory.

2 Creating NEs by Using theSearch Method

Mandatory. It is recommended that youcreate an NE in IP Auto Discovery mode.

3 Logging In to an NE Mandatory.Enter correct values in User Name andPassword. The default User Name is lct,and the default Password is password.

4 Changing the NE ID Mandatory. Set parameters as follows:l Set ID according to the guideline

specified in the DCN plan.l If a specific extended NE ID is required,

change Extended ID.

5 Changing the NE Name Optional.

6 Setting NE CommunicationParameters

Mandatory if special requirements areimposed on the IP address of the NE. SetIP and Subnet Mask as required.NOTE

If the IP address of an NE is not changedmanually, the IP address changes to0x81000000 + NE ID.

7 Configuring Logical Boards Mandatory.

8 Synchronizing NE Time Mandatory. This operation synchronizesNE time with the time on the computer thatruns the Web LCT.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

Page 50: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Procedure for Configuring an Radio Link (XPIC Disabled)

Table 4-4 Procedure for configuring an Radio link (XPIC disabled)

Step Action Description

1 4.2.8Creating anIF 1+1ProtectionGroupa

Mandatory when radio links are configured with 1+1protection.Set the parameters according to the network plan.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

Page 51: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step Action Description

2 4.2.9Configuringthe IF/ODUInformationof a RadioLink

Mandatory.l In the case of the TDM microwave, set main parameters

as follows:– Set Work Mode and Link ID according to the network

plan.– Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz), and

TX Power(dBm) according to the network plan.– Set TX Status to Unmute.– Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal

level specified in the network plan. The antennamisalignment indication function is enabled only afterthis parameter is set. When the antenna misalignmentindication function is enabled, if the actual receivepower of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the powerexpected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IFboard connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on,300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are notaligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30consecutive minutes, the NE automatically disablesthe antenna misalignment indication function.

NOTEl After the site commissioning, however, you need to reset

ATPC Enable Status according to site requirements.

l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need toconfigure the IF and ODU information on the main radio linkonly. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need toconfigure the IF and ODU information on the main radio linkand the ODU information on the standby radio link.

l For TDM radio links configured with N+1 protection, youneed to configure the IF and ODU information on each link.Work Mode must be configured as 7, STM-1, 28MHz,128QAM.

l For the Integrated IP radio, set main parameters as follows:– Set AM Enable Status and IF Channel Bandwidth

according to the network plan.– Set AM Enable Status to Disabled. In addition, set

Manually Specified Modulation Mode toModulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacityaccording to the network plan.

– Set Guarantee E1 Capacity and Link ID accordingto the network plan.

– Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz), andTX Power(dBm) according to the network plan.

– Set TX Status to Unmute.– Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal

level specified in the network plan. The antenna

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

Page 52: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step Action Description

misalignment indication function is enabled only afterthis parameter is set. When the antenna misalignmentindication function is enabled, if the actual receivepower of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the powerexpected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IFboard connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on,300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are notaligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30consecutive minutes, the NE automatically disablesthe antenna misalignment indication function.

NOTEl After the site commissioning, however, you need to reset AM

Enable Status and ATPC Enable Status according to siterequirements.

l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need toconfigure the IF and ODU information on the main radio linkonly. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need toconfigure the IF and ODU information on the main radio linkand the ODU information on the standby radio link.

l To configure Integrated IP radio links with N+1 protection,you need to configure the IF and ODU information on eachlink.

3 CheckingAlarms

Mandatory.

Procedure for Configuring an Radio Link (XPIC Enabled)

Table 4-5 Procedure for configuring an Radio link (XPIC enabled)

Step Action Description

1 4.2.10Creating anXPICWorkgroup

Mandatory.Set the parameters according to the network plan.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

Page 53: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step Action Description

2 4.2.11Setting theHybrid/AMAttributesof the XPICWorkgroup

Mandatory. Set parameters as follows:l If the AM function is enabled for the XPIC link, set AM

Enable Status to Disabled. In addition, set ManuallySpecified Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode ofthe Guarantee AM Capacity according to the networkplan.

l If the AM function is disabled, set AM Enable Status toDisabled. Set Manually Specified Modulation Mode tothe modulation mode according to the network plan.

l AM parameters must be the same in the horizontal andvertical polarization directions of the XPIC link.

NOTEIn TDM microwave mode, the AM attributes do not need to beconfigured for the links where the XPIC function is enabled.

3 4.2.8Creating anIF 1+1ProtectionGroup

Mandatory when two XPIC workgroups need to form two 1+1 protection groups.Set the parameters according to the network plan.NOTE

One XPIC workgroup cannot form a 1+1 protection group. The radiolink in the horizontal/vertical polarization direction of the XPICworkgroup can form a 1+1 protection group with the radio link in thehorizontal/vertical polarization direction of the other XPICworkgroup.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

Page 54: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step Action Description

4 4.2.9Configuringthe IF/ODUInformationof a RadioLink

Mandatory. Configure the IF and ODU information in bothhorizontal and vertical polarization directions. Set parametersas follows:l In the case of the TDM microwave, set main parameters

as follows:– Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received

signal level specified in the network plan. The antennamisalignment indication function is enabled only afterthis parameter is set. When the antenna misalignmentindication function is enabled, if the actual receivepower of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the powerexpected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IFboard connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 mson, 300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are notaligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30consecutive minutes, the NE automatically disablesthe antenna misalignment indication function.

– Power to Be Received(dBm) must be the same in thehorizontal and vertical polarization directions.

– NOTEl After the site commissioning, however, you need to reset

ATPC Enable Status according to site requirements.

l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you needto configure the IF and ODU information on the mainradio link only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD,you need to configure the IF and ODU information onthe main radio link and the ODU information on thestandby radio link.

l For TDM radio links configured with N+1 protection,you need to configure the IF and ODU information oneach link. Work Mode must be configured as 7, STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM.

l For the Integrated IP radio, set main parameters asfollows:– Set Guarantee E1 Capacity according to the network

plan.– Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received

signal level specified in the network plan. The antennamisalignment indication function is enabled only afterthis parameter is set. When the antenna misalignmentindication function is enabled, if the actual receivepower of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the powerexpected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IFboard connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 mson, 300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are notaligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30consecutive minutes, the NE automatically disablesthe antenna misalignment indication function.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

Page 55: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step Action Description

– Power to Be Received(dBm) must be the same in thehorizontal and vertical polarization directions.

NOTEl After the site commissioning, however, you need to reset

AM Enable Status and ATPC Enable Status according tosite requirements.

l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need toconfigure the IF and ODU information on the main radio linkonly. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need toconfigure the IF and ODU information on the main radio linkand the ODU information on the standby radio link.

l To configure Integrated IP radio links with N+1 protection,you need to configure the IF and ODU information on eachlink.

5 CheckingAlarms

Mandatory.

4.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDUConnecting the Web LCT to the IDU properly is a prerequisite for future data configuration andfor other commissioning items.

Prerequisite

The equipment is powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Web LCT

Procedure

Step 1 Start the laptop and log in to the operating system.

Step 2 Set the IP address of the laptop.

The IP address of the laptop should meet the following requirements:

l The IP address of the laptop is in the same network segment (the default network segmentis 129.9.0.0) as the NE, but their IP addresses are different.

l The subnet mask for the IP address of the laptop is the same as that for the IP address of theNE (the default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0).

l The default gateway IP address is blank.

Step 3 Use a network cable to connect the Ethernet port of the laptop to the NMS/COM port on thesystem control, switching, and timing board.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

Page 56: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NMS/COM

CAUTIONEnsure that the network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port of the laptop and theNMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board. Otherwise, the equipmentor test tool may be damaged.

NOTE

The NMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board supports the auto-MDI/MDI-X mode.Therefore, straight-through cables and crossover cables can both be used to set up a connection. For pinassignments for crossover cables and straight-through cables, see Network Cable in the OptiX RTN 950 RadioTransmission System IDU Hardware Description.

At this point, the indicators at the Ethernet port and the NMS/COM port are on (green). Amessage will be displayed indicating that the network has established a local connection if theoperating system has been configured to do so. If the operating system displays a messageindicating an IP address conflict, change the IP address.

Step 4 Optional: Set the Internet Explorer as the default browser.

Step 5 Optional: Set the security level of the Internet Explorer to medium or lower.

Step 6 Optional: Disable the Pop-up Blocker.

NOTEIf plug-ins that can block pop-up windows are also installed, disable their blocking function.

Step 7 Optional: Set the options of the Internet Explorer.

1. Run the Internet Explorer.

2. Choose Tool > Internet Options from the main menu of the Internet Explorer.

3. On the General tab, click Settings in the Temporary Internet files area.

4. In Check for newer versions of stored pages, click Every visit to the page, and thenclick OK.

5. After being returned to the General tab, click OK.

Step 8 On the desktop, double-click the Start Web LCT icon.

The system displays the USER LOGIN window of the Web LCT.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

Page 57: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 9 Enter the values of User Name and Password, and then click Login.l User Name: adminl Password: adminIf the entered user name and the password are both correct, the NE List page is displayed in theInternet Explorer.

----End

4.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search MethodThe search method is generally used to create an NE during site commissioning.

Prerequisitel The communication between the NMS and the NE is in the normal state.l The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

ProcedureStep 1 Click NE Search in NE List and select a desired search type.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

Page 58: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

If... Then...

All NEs are directly connected to the NMS server throughEthernet cables

Perform Step 2 to Step 5.

Not all NEs are directly connected to the NMS server throughEthernet cables

Perform Step 6 to Step 11.

Step 2 Select NE Search.The Search NE dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set Local IP Address based on the network planning information.

NOTE

Local IP Address indicates the IP address of an Ethernet port on the NMS server. There may be multiple LocalIP Address values because an NMS server may have multiple network adapters.

Step 4 Set NE IP Address based on the network planning information.

NOTE

NE IP Address indicates the IP addresses of all NEs (searched out by the system automatically) that areconnected to the NMS server directly through Ethernet cables.

Step 5 Click OK.TIP

When NE Search is selected, the system can directly log in to NEs. You do not need to enter the user nameand password.

Step 6 Select Advanced Search.The Search NE dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 Optional: If you select IP auto discovery, then:1. Click Search.2. After the Web LCT finds the NEs to be managed, click End Search.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

Page 59: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

In the IP auto discovery mode, the Web LCT searches for the gateway NE and non-gateway NEs that aremanaged by the gateway NE in the network segment where the server resides.

Step 8 Optional: If you select Search NE, then:1. Click Manage Domain.

The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.2. Optional: Click Add to add a network segment. Then, set Domain Type and Domain

Address.3. Optional: Select an existing network segment and click Modify to modify the network

segment.4. Optional: Select an existing network segment and click Delete to delete the network

segment.5. Click Search.6. After the WebLCT finds the NEs, click End Search.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

Page 60: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

During initial configuration, Manage Domain takes the default value of 129.9.255.255. After the IP addressof the gateway NE is changed, the value of Manage Domain also needs to be changed. The default networksegment cannot be modified or deleted.

Step 9 Select the NE that needs to be added and click Add NE.A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the NE is added successfully.

Step 10 Click OK.A new NE has been added to the NE list.

Step 11 Click Cancel.

----End

4.2.3 Logging In to an NEAfter an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.l The NE to be managed is already created in NE List.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login.TIP

You can select multiple NEs at one time.

The NE Login dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Enter User Name and Password. Then, click OK.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

Page 61: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

l The default User Name is lct.l The default Password for user lct is password.

Login Status of the NE in the NE List changes to Logged In. Alarm Status of the NE is changedfrom Unknown to the current alarm status of the NE.

Step 3 Click NE Explorer.The NE Explorer is displayed.

TIP

To quickly start the NE Explorer, double-click the NE to be managed in the NE list.TIP

l Check the legend to learn the specific meanings of different colors and symbols in the slot layoutdiagram.

l Click to collapse/expand the legend.

----End

Related ReferencesA.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE

4.2.4 Changing the NE IDModify the NE ID according to the engineering plan and ensure that each NE ID is unique.Modifying the NE ID does not interrupt services.

PrerequisiteThe NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

Page 62: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > NEAttribute from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Modify NE ID.The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Specify New ID and New Extended ID.

Step 4 Click OK.Click OK in the displayed confirmation dialog box.

----End

Related ReferencesA.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change

4.2.5 Changing the NE NameFor ease of identification in the Main Topology, name the NE according to the NE's geographicallocation or the device connected to the NE.

PrerequisiteThe NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > NEAttribute from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Enter the name of the NE in the Name field.

NOTE

The name of an NE cannot contain any spaces or Chinese characters.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

Page 63: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 3 Click Apply.

----End

4.2.6 Setting NE Communication ParametersThe communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE, the gateway IPaddress, and the subnet mask.

PrerequisiteThe NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE.

Step 3 Click Apply.

NOTE

l If configuring multiple parameters, click Apply for each instance.

l If the new IP address in the IP field is not in the original network segment, reset the IP address of the WebLCT and ensure that it is in the same segment as the new IP address of the NE. Otherwise, the NE isunreachable to the Web LCT.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

Page 64: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

----End

Related ReferencesA.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting

4.2.7 Configuring Logical BoardsAdd the logical board in the slot layout if it has not already been added. If the physical board isinconsistent with the logical board in the slot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board andadd the correct logical board.

Prerequisitel The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.l All the boards are installed correctly.l The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is turned on and the communication between the

IDU and the ODU is normal.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

ProcedureStep 1 Click the Slot Layout tab and click Add Physical Boards.

Based on the slot layout, the NE automatically configures the logical boards that are requiredbut are not yet configured for certain physical boards.

Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added, right-click and select Add XXX. "XXX"is the name of the board to be added.

Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted, right-click and select Delete.NOTE

Before deleting the board, delete the data, such as the service, clock, orderwire, and protection, on theboard.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

Page 65: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

----End

4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection GroupIf the radio link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1+1 protection group.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on theSlot Layout.

l The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in the paired slots.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Web LCT

Background Information

When a 1+0 service is converted into 1+1 HSB protection group by configuring an IF 1+1protection group, the original service is not interrupted. The board where the original serviceexists, however, needs to be set to the working board.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

Page 66: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Procedure

Step 1 For an IF 1+1 protection group comprised of ISU2 or ISX2 boards, set IF Service Type toappropriate values for the main and standby IF boards according to the network plan.

NOTE

l Ensure that the values of IF Service Type set for the main and standby IF boards are the same and meet thenetwork plan requirements.

l For ISU2 or ISX2 boards, the default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > LinkConfiguration from the Function Tree.

2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.3. Changes the values of IF Service Type for the main and standby IF boards according to

the network plan.4. Click Apply.

Step 2 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LinkConfiguration from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.

Step 4 Click New.The Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Configure the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.

NOTE

It is recommended to set the parameters for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection as follows:

l Set Working Mode according to the network plan.

l Set Revertive Mode to Revertive.

l Set WTR Time(s) to the default value.

l Set Enable Reverse Switching according to the network plan. When Working Mode is HSB, set EnableReverse Switching to Disabled; when Working Mode is SD, set Enable Reverse Switching toEnabled; when Working Mode is FD, Enable Reverse Switching is invalid.

l Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s) and EnableReverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

Page 67: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Related ReferencesA.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1 Protection

4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio LinkBy performing this operation, you can configure the IF/ODU information for a radio link.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the

Slot Layout.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Precautionsl For 1+1 HSB/SD protection, you need to configure only the IF/ODU information of the

main radio link.l For 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the main radio

link and the ODU information of the standby radio link.l Before configuring XPIC workgroups, you need to set IF Service Type separately for IF

boards in the vertical polarization and those in horizontal polarization.l For N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links

respectively.l The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported, if the E1 count, AM enabled status, STM-1

count, or modulation mode is set inconsistently for both ends of an Integrated IP radio link.This alarm should be cleared immediately. Otherwise, services may be configuredunsuccessfully or interrupted.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration fromthe Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon.The system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board or ODU towhich the IF board is connected belongs.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

Page 68: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link.

Step 5 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.

NOTE

The recommended settings for the parameters are as follows:

l Set TX Frequency(MHz) and T/R Spacing(MHz) according to the network plan.

l Set TX Power(dBm) according to the network plan. The value of this parameter should not be higher thanthe rated maximum transmit power of the ODU.

l Set TX Status to Unmute.

l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) according to the network plan. The antenna misalignment indicationfunction is enabled only after this parameter is set.

Step 6 Click Apply.

----End

Related ReferencesA.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

4.2.10 Creating an XPIC WorkgroupIf you configure two XPIC radio links after binding the two radio links as an XPIC workgroup,the parameter settings including the channel bandwidth, transmit frequency, transmit power, andATPC attribute are the same for the two radio links.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.l The corresponding XPIC IF boards and the ODUs connected to the XPIC IF boards are

added to the NE Panel.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Web LCT

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

Page 69: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LinkConfiguration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the XPIC tab.

Step 3 Click New.The Create XPIC Working Group dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Configure the parameters for the XPIC protection group.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

Related ReferencesA.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation

4.2.11 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC WorkgroupAfter the XPIC Workgroup is created, you need to configure the AM attributes of the XPICIntegrated IP radio link according to the planned values.

Prerequisitel The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.l The XPIC protection group has been created.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

Page 70: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Background InformationThe XPIC IF boards, IFX2 and ISX2, support Integrated IP radio, and the AM attributes can beconfigured.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LinkConfiguration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the XPIC tab.

Step 3 Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab.

Step 4 Configure the AM attributes of the XPIC Hybrid radio link.

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

Related ReferencesA.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC

4.2.12 Synchronizing NE TimeAdjust the NE time so that the NE time is synchronized with the time on the NMS. In this manner,the NMS can accurately record the time when an alarm, a performance event, or an abnormalevent occurred.

Prerequisitel The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured.l Time settings on the Web LCT are correct.l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > NE TimeSynchronization from the Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

Page 71: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 2 Right-click the NE whose time needs to be synchronized and choose Synchronize with NMTime from the shortcut menu.

----End

4.2.13 Configuring the OrderwireThe orderwire for an NE provides a dedicated communication channel that the networkmaintenance personnel can use.

PrerequisiteThe NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwirefrom the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the General tab.

Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Optional: Change the overhead bytes occupied by the orderwire.1. Click the Advanced tab.2. Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

Page 72: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

3. Click Apply.

----End

Related ReferencesA.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_GeneralA.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

4.2.14 Checking AlarmsBy checking the alarms generated by the equipment, you can determine whether the equipmentis working properly.

Prerequisitel The equipment is connected to the Web LCT.l Data configuration is complete.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE from the Object Tree, and then click on the toolbar.

Step 2 Click the Browse Current Alarms tab.

Step 3 Check the displayed alarm information.Check whether there are any equipment alarms, the following alarms in particular:l POWER_ALMl FAN_FAILl HARD_BADl BD_STATUSl SYNC_C_LOSl CONFIG_NOSUPPORTl NESF_LOSTl TEMP_ALARMl IF_CABLE_OPENl XPIC_LOSFor details about the preceding alarms and about how to handle them, refer to the OptiX RTN950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

----End

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

Page 73: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using theHandheld Tool

This section describes how to configure site commissioning data by using the handheld tool.

4.3.1 Connecting the Handheld Tool to the IDUThe handheld tool needs to be connected to the IDU before data configuration.

Prerequisite

The equipment is powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Handheld tool

Procedure

Step 1 Use appropriate cables to connect the handheld tool to the OptiX RTN 950, as shown in Figure4-4.

Figure 4-4 Connecting the handheld tool to the IDU

DB9-female DB9-male RJ-45 connector

NMS/COM port onthe CSH, CST board

Hand-heldtool

MINI USBport

Step 2 Press the Power button on the handheld tool until the handheld tool starts. Two seconds later,the login window is displayed.

Step 3 Press Up or Down button to log in to the local NE or another NE, and then press Enter.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

Page 74: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 4 Optional: If you select to log in to another NE, enter the basic NE ID and extended NE ID.1. Enter the extended NE ID, and then press Enter.

2. Enter the basic NE ID, and then press Enter.

3. Ensure that the NE ID is correct, and then press Enter.

NOTE

If the input basic NE ID or extended NE ID is incorrect, press the C button to return to the upper-levelmenu and rectify it.

Step 5 The handheld tool is logged in to the system automatically and the NE information is queried.The information about the queried slot is displayed in the standby window.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

Page 75: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

l If the Login Fail ! message is displayed in the login window, the handheld tool starts another loginattempt until login succeeds.

l Login is completed automatically and may last a long period. Do not press any button in the loginprocess. Otherwise, the system stops the login process.

l In the standby window, the handheld tool relogs in to the system any time you press the 0 button.

l If the Abnormal Connection message is displayed in the standby window, check the physicalconnection between the handheld tool and the NE. Ensure that the connection is normal and then relogin to the system.

l The upward arrow in the upper right corner of the standby interface indicates the status of the physicalconnection. If the arrow blinks regularly, the connection is normal. Otherwise, relog in to the systemaccording to the prompt message of the system.

----End

4.3.2 Setting NE AttributesSetting NE attributes includes setting NE ID, NE IP, and NE name.

Prerequisite

The handheld tool is logged in to the NE.

NOTE

In the case of the Integrated IP radio, the AM function is disabled by default on the handheld tool.

Procedure

Step 1 When the handheld tool displays the standby window, press F2 to configure NE attributes.

Step 2 Set NE name.

1. Select 1-NE name and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

2. Set the NE name according to the network plan.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

Page 76: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

l Only the first 11 characters of the NE name can be displayed on the interface.

l An NE name can contain a maximum of 21 characters currently. You can press F1 to shift betweendifferent symbols.

3. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

Step 3 Configure NE ID and extended ID.1. Select 2-NE ID and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

2. Set NE ID according to the network plan.3. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.4. Select 3-Ext-ID and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

5. Set the extended ID according to the network plan.6. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

Step 4 Configure NE IP, subnet mask, and gateway NE.1. Select 5-IP and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

2. Set NE IP according to the network plan.

NOTE

The IP address is composed of four fields. After you finish one field, press Enter to enter the nextfield.

3. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.4. Select 6-MSK and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

Page 77: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

5. Set the subnet mask according to the network plan.6. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.7. Select 7-GNE and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

8. Set the gate NE according to the network plan.9. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

Step 5 Select 8-APPLY, and press Enter to save the data.The Confirm Configure ? dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Select YES and press Enter to save the data. Then, the system starts saving the previousconfiguration.

NOTE

l In the configuration process, you can press C to return to the previous menu.

l After the system saves the configuration, it automatically backs up the database and the backup operationlasts 30 to 60 seconds. You need to check the backup result.

l If you change NE ID or extended ID in the configuration process, the handheld tool automatically relogs into the system after the system successfully backs up the updated data. Then, the standby interface is displayed.If the system fails in backing up the updated data, the active configuration interface is displayed.

----End

4.3.3 Configuring a Radio LinkTo configure a radio link, you can configure the IF information, ODU information, and protectionmodes of the radio link.

PrerequisiteThe handheld tool is logged in to the NE.

Procedure

Step 1 When the handheld tool displays the standby window, press F1 to configure IF attributes.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

Page 78: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

By default, the system displays the information about the radio link carried by the IF board in the slot with thesmallest number.

Step 2 Select the required IF board.

1. Select 1-Board and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

2. Select the online IF board.

3. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.

NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of themain radio link only.

Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection.

1. Select 7-Protection and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of IF 1+1 protectionmodes is displayed.

2. Select an IF 1+1 protection mode according to the network plan.

When you configure IF 1+1 protection with the handheld tool, the default main/standby IFboards are as follows:

Link ID Slot of Main IF Board Slot of Standby IF Board

1 1 2

2 3 5

3 4 6

3. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

Page 79: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of themain radio link only.

Step 4 Configure IF information for a radio link

1. Select 5-BandWidth and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of IF bandwidthis displayed.

NOTE

For the ISU2/ISX2 board, press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

a. Select a working mode for the ISU2/ISX2 board by pressing the Up and Down keys. Then, pressEnter. The configuration interface of IF bandwidth is displayed.

b. If you select 1-ISU2/ISX2, the ISU2/ISX2 board works in Hybrid (Native E1+ETH) mode. Thefollowing figure shows available IF bandwidth in this mode.

c. If you select 2-ISU2/ISX2, the ISU2/ISX2 board works in Hybrid (Native STM-1+ETH) mode. Thefollowing figure shows available IF bandwidth in this mode.

d. If you select 3-ISU2/ISX2, the ISU2/ISX2 board works in SDH mode. The following figure showsavailable IF bandwidth in this mode.

2. Select the IF bandwidth according to the network plan.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

Page 80: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

3. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.

NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of themain radio link only.

4. Select 6-Modulate and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of modulation modesis displayed.

NOTE

For the ISU2/ISX2 board, interfaces for selecting modulation modes are IF bandwidth-specific.

5. Select the modulation mode according to the network plan.6. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.

NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of themain radio link only.

Step 5 Configure the ODU information of an NE.1. Select 2-Frequency and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of transmit

frequencies is displayed.

2. Enter the value of transmit frequency (MHz) according to the network plan.

NOTE

l Press the F1 key to enter a point.

l If the ODU is online, the system displays the frequency range that the ODU supports.

3. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.4. Select 3-TRSpacing and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of T/R spacing is

displayed.

5. Enter the value of T/R spacing (MHz) according to the network plan.

NOTE

Press the F1 key to enter a point.

6. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

Page 81: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

7. Select 4-TX Power and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of transmit poweris displayed.

8. Enter the value of transmit power (dBm) according to the network plan.NOTE

Press the F1 key to enter a point.

9. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

Step 6 Select 8 APPLY and press Enter to confirm the configuration.The system starts delivering the configuration. After the configuration is delivered, the last lineof the system interface displays Any Key To Continue.

Step 7 Press any key to continue. After the configuration data is saved, the current configurationinterface is automatically displayed.

NOTE

The waiting time is about 30 to 60 seconds.

----End

4.3.4 Checking AlarmsBy checking the alarms generated on the equipment, you can check whether the equipment isworking properly.

PrerequisiteThe handheld tool is logged in to the NE.

ProcedureStep 1 When the handheld tool displays the standby window, press F3 to query the NE information.

Step 2 Select 5-Current Alarm Query and press Enter. Then, the query interface is displayed.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

Page 82: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

TIP

You can press the Up or Down button to check the query result about OptiX RTN 950.

Step 3 Check the displayed alarm information.

Check whether there are any equipment alarms, the following alarms in particular:

l POWER_ALM

l FAN_FAIL

l HARD_BAD

l BD_STATUS

l SYNC_C_LOS

l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT

l NESF_LOST

l TEMP_ALARM

l IF_CABLE_OPEN

l XPIC_LOS

For details about the preceding alarms and about how to handle them, refer to the OptiX RTN950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

----End

4.4 Testing Connectivity of CablesDuring the installation of the OptiX RTN 900, the cables may be connected to service interfacesincorrectly, or the hardware may malfunction. To ensure that the services run properly, testconnectivity of the cables.

4.4.1 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Web LCTBy testing connectivity of E1 cables, you can check whether the E1 cables are properly connectedbetween the equipment and the DDF, and whether the E1 cables are in the normal state.

Prerequisite

The equipment must be equipped with an E1 interface board, and the E1 port must travel throughthe DDF before being connected to another device.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Web LCT

l BER tester

Procedure

Step 1 At the DDF, connect the BER tester to the first E1 port of the IDU.

The BER tester displays the AIS alarm.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

Page 83: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Figure 4-5 Connecting the BER tester

RX TXDDF

1234....

RX TX

BER tester

Step 2 Set the corresponding E1 port to Outloop using the Web LCT.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Outloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 3 Observe the BER tester.The BER tester should not display the AIS alarm any more.

Step 4 Release the outloop set in Step 2.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 5 Observe the BER tester.The BER tester should report the AIS alarm.

Step 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 5 to test all the other E1 ports.

----End

4.4.2 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Handheld ToolBy testing connectivity of E1 cables, you can check whether the E1 cables between the equipmentand the DDF are connected correctly, and whether the E1 cables are in normal status. Whenperforming site commissioning with the handheld tool, test the connectivity of E1 cables usingthe PRBS function enabled on the NE.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

Page 84: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Prerequisitel The NE houses an E1 interface board, and the E1 port travels through the DDF before being

connected to another device.

l The handheld tool is logged in to the NE.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Handheld tool

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the handheld tool to the OptiX RTN 950. For details, see 4.3.1 Connecting theHandheld Tool to the IDU.

Step 2 On the DDF, perform a hardware loopback at the first E1 port on the IDU.

RX TXDDF

1234....

Step 3 Test the cable connectivity of the first port with the handheld tool.

1. When the handheld tool displays the standby window, press F3 to query the NE information.

2. Select 6-E1 Cable Check and press Enter. Then, the tributary board configurationinterface is displayed.

3. Select the tributary board that is connected to the first E1 port, and press Enter to test cableconnectivity.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

Page 85: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

4. Check the test result.Port 1 does not fail.

5. Press any button to display the NE information query interface.

Step 4 Release the hardware loopback that is performed in Step 2.

Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to test cable connectivity at the other ports.

----End

4.4.3 Testing Connectivity of Network CablesBy testing connectivity of network cables, you can determine whether the network cables are inthe normal state.

PrerequisiteThe network cables are already made.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsNetwork cable tester

Background InformationYou can also test the connectivity of a network cable by performing a loopback on the data ports(this method is applicable when the equipment is powered on). Specifically, use the networkcable to be tested to connect any two data ports. If the LINK indicators of the two data ports turnon, it indicates that the network cable is in the normal state.

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the network cable to the port of the network cable tester.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

Page 86: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Figure 4-6 Testing the Ethernet service cable

Step 2 Check the indicator of the network cable tester.

Network Cable End A End B

Straight-through cable The 1-8-G indicators turn onone after another.

The 1-8-G indicators turn on one afteranother.

Crossover cable The 1-8-G indicators turn onone after another.

The 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G indicatorsturn on one after another.

Step 3 Connect the network cable that passes the test to the Ethernet port of the device.

----End

4.4.4 Checking Fiber Jumper ConnectionDuring installation, the fiber jumpers may be incorrectly connected or the attenuation may beexcessively high. As a result, services will fail to run properly. To prevent this situation, checkthe connection after the fiber jumper is routed from the optical interface to the optical distributionframe (ODF). This topic mainly describes how to test the fiber jumper connection by using anoptical interface board.

Prerequisitel The fiber jumper is installed and routed from the optical interface to the ODF.l The equipment is powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Optical power meterl Short fiber jumper

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

Page 87: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Precautions

DANGERWhen you are checking the connection of fiber jumpers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laserbeams.

Connection Diagram

When you use an optical interface board to test the fiber jumper connection, connect the fiberjumper to the optical power meter on the ODF side and connect the fiber jumper to the TX portof the optical interface board on the chassis side. Figure 4-7 shows the connection.

Figure 4-7 Connection diagram for checking the fiber jumper connection by using an opticalinterface board

TX RX

ExternalCable

Fiber jumper connectedto the TX port

ODF

Procedure

Step 1 On the chassis side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port of the optical interfaceboard.

Step 2 Connect the optical power meter to the TX port of the optical interface board with a short fiberjumper.

Step 3 Switch on the optical power meter and set the operating wavelength according to the type ofoptical interface. The measured launched optical power of the optical interface board is A.

Step 4 Insert the fiber jumper back into the TX port.

Step 5 On the ODF side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port. Connect the fiber jumper to theoptical power meter. The measured optical power is B.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

Page 88: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 6 Disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port of the optical interface board. The optical powermeter reads "LO" and does not receive any optical signals.

Step 7 Compare the values of A and B.l If the difference between A and B is less than 1 dB, it indicates that the fiber jumper is

correctly connected and the attenuation of the fiber jumper is within the normal range.l If the difference between A and B is more than 1 dB, verify that the fiber jumper is in good

condition and is correctly routed. Then, verify that the fiber jumper terminal is clean.

CAUTIONIf the fiber jumper is connected through a flange, the difference between A and B should be lessthan 2 dB. Otherwise, it indicates that the fiber jumper is incorrectly connected or the attenuationof the fiber jumper is not within the normal range. Verify that the fiber jumper is in good conditionand is correctly routed. Then, Verify that the fiber jumper terminal is clean.

Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to check the fiber jumper that is connected to the RX port.

Step 9 Restore the fiber jumper connections on the chassis side and the ODF side.

Step 10 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to check fiber jumper connections of other optical interfaces and thenrestore the connections when completed.

----End

4.5 Aligning the AntennasAligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning. The alignment hasa direct effect on the performance of the radio links.

4.5.1 Main Lobe and Side LobesEngineers performing an alignment on an antenna should be familiar with the related knowledgeof the main lobe and side lobes

Definitions of the Main Lobe and Side LobesThe electric field strength of the radiated power of an antenna varies in space. The differencesof the power distribution can be shown in an azimuth diagram. Generally, there are the horizontalazimuth diagram for the horizontal section and the vertical azimuth diagram for the verticalsection. Figure 4-8 is a vertical azimuth diagram. There are many lobes in this figure. The lobewith the strongest radiated power is the main lobe. The other lobes are side lobes wherein thefirst side lobe can be used for aligning the antenna.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

Page 89: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Figure 4-8 Main lobe and side lobes

Main lobe

First side lobeSecond side lobe

Locating the Main LobeAntenna alignment involves making the main lobe of the local antenna align with the main lobeof the opposite antenna. The purpose is to make the received signal strength of the oppositeantenna reach the maximum value.

The main lobe width of the microwave antenna is narrow, between 0.6° and 3.7°. For instance,in the case of a 1.2 m antenna at a working frequency of 23 GHz, the azimuth is only 0.9° whenthe signal level drops from the signal peak to zero. Once a signal is detected, very small alignmentadjustments are required to locate the main lobe.

Antenna movement across the main lobe results in a rapid rise and fall in the signal level. Whetherthe main lobe is aligned properly can be verified by comparing the received signal peaks.Typically, the main lobe signal peak is 20-25 dB higher than the first side lobe signal peak.

Figure 4-9 shows the head-on view of a free-space model for radio propagation with concentricrings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main lobe.

Figure 4-9 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna

0o

a Horizontal section ofthe antenna

90o

180o

0o

90o

180o

Center of the main lobe

Outer edge of the main lobe, 3-10 dB lower than the main lobe

Trough between the main lobeand the first side lobe, 30 dB

lower than the main lobeFirst side lobe, 20-25 dBlower than the main lobe

Trough between the first side lobeand the second side lobe, 30 dBor more lower than the main lobe

Second side lobe, wheresignals are very weakb Head-on view

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

Page 90: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Tracking Path

Side lobe signal readings are sometimes mistaken for main lobe readings when signals aretracked on different elevation (or azimuth). Figure 4-10 shows a horizontal radio propagationmodel of the antenna, and signal levels at three different elevation positions (1-7 represent themeasured signal level values of the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port of the ODU).

Figure 4-10 Three tracking paths

Signal levels for each path

31

2

B

7

4 5

6

A

B'

A'

C'C

A'A

B B'

C C'

Head-on view of tracking paths fordifferent elevations

24

6 7

1 3

5

l Line AA' indicates that the main lobe of the antenna is almost aligned properly. The mainlobe is at point 2, and the first side lobes are at points 1 and 3. Slightly adjust the azimuthof the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

l Line BB' indicates that the elevation of the antenna slightly deviates from the main lobe.The signal peaks appear at points 4 and 5. The signal peak at point 4 is higher than thesignal peak at point 5 because of the antenna characteristics. As a result, point 4 may bemistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuthof the antenna to the middle position between the two signal peaks. Then, adjust theelevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust theelevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

l Line CC' indicates that the elevation of the antenna completely deviates from the main lobeand is almost aligned with the first side lobe. The signal peak of the first side lobe at point6 and the signal peak of the first side lobe at point 7 appear as one signal peak. As a result,points 6 and 7 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correctmethod is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7. Then, adjustthe elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjustthe elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

When the side lobe peak at one side is higher than the side lobe peak at the other side, as shownin Figure 4-11, a common error is moving the antenna left to right along line DD', or top tobottom along line EE'. As a result, point 1 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobesignal. The correct method is to adjust the elevation in the middle of points 1 and 2 or the azimuthin the middle of points 1 and 3. Several adjustments are required so that the three signal peaksof line AA' can appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 asshown in Figure 4-10 until the peak signal appears.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

Page 91: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Figure 4-11 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe

1 3

E E'

D

12

D'

D D'

E

E'

1 2

3

4.5.2 Aligning Single-Polarized AntennasWhen aligning single-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting theazimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends.

Prerequisitel The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link is complete.

l The weather at both stations is suitable for outdoor operations and there is no threat of rain,snow, or fog.

l On-site conditions meet the requirements for the antennas to operate at a high altitude andthe personnel commissioning the antennas are trained to work at high altitudes.

l The Multimeter is calibrated.

l The ATPC function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).

l The AM function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Adjustable wrench

l Telescope

l Interphone

l Hex key

l Multimeter (with a BNC connecter prepared at one end for future tests)

l North-stabilized indicator

Precautionsl If the radio link is configured in 1+1 protection mode and one antenna is used at each end,

power off the standby ODUs at both ends before aligning the antennas. After the antennasare aligned, power on the standby ODUs at both ends.

l If the radio link is configured in 1+1 SD mode, align the antennas in the following sequence:

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

Page 92: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

1. Power on the main ODUs at both ends. Ensure that they are powered on during thealignment.

2. Power off the standby ODUs at both ends. Then, align the main antennas at both ends.3. Power on the standby ODU at the local end. Retain the position of the main antenna

at the remote end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the local end.4. Power on the standby ODU at the remote end. Retain the position of the main antenna

at the local end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the remote end.l If the radio link is configured in 1+1 FD mode and two antennas are used at each end, align

the antenna in the following sequence:

1. Power on the main ODUs, power off the standby ODUs, and align the main antennasat both ends.

2. Power off the main ODUs, power on the standby ODUs, and align the diversityantennas at both ends.

CAUTIONYou can adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antennas by adjusting the appropriate nuts orscrews. For details, see the installation guide for the antennas.

Procedure

Step 1 Determine the azimuth of the antenna according to the installation position and height of theantenna. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna to the horizontal position.

Step 2 Connect a multimeter to the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port on the ODU at thelocal end and test the voltage value VBNC.

TIP

It is recommended that you make the test line terminated with a BNC connector at one end in advance,because it is more convenient for testing the voltage value VBNC.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

Page 93: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Figure 4-12 Testing the RSSI voltage by using a multimeter

Step 3 Adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antenna as follows:

1. Keep the remote antenna fixed.

2. Use the multimeter to measure VBNC. At the local end, rotate the antenna widely in thehorizontal direction.When you rotate the antenna, the tested signal peaks may be as follows:

l Three signal peaks are tracked, for example, line AA' in Figure 4-10. In this case, adjustthe azimuth of the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-10.

l Two signal peaks are tracked, for example, line BB' in Figure 4-10. In this case, adjustthe azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 4 and 5 as shown in Figure 4-10.Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case ofline AA' can appear. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown inFigure 4-10.

l One signal peak is tracked, for example, line CC' in Figure 4-10. In this case, adjustthe azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7 as shown in Figure 4-10.Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case ofline AA' can appear. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown inFigure 4-10.

3. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-10 until VBNCreaches the peak within the tracked range.

4. Adjust the antenna until the VBNC voltage reaches the peak value. Then, fix the antenna atthe local end.

NOTEWhen you tighten the antenna, ensure that the VBNC voltage remains at the peak value.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

Page 94: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 4 Repeat Step 2 to Step 3 to adjust the antenna at the remote end. When VBNC reaches the peakvalue, tighten the antenna at the remote end.

Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 two to four times. When VBNC at the local end and VBNC at the remoteend reach the peak value, tighten the antennas at both ends

Step 6 Use the multimeter to test VBNC at both ends. Obtain the current RSL by referring to therelationship curve between VBNC of ODUs and the RSLs at both ends.

NOTE

The curve diagram for VBNC and RSL is delivered along with the ODU.

The actual RSL must be the same as the value planned by the network planning department.

NOTE

l If VBNC does not meet the requirements, see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide for suggestion on how to handle the issue.

Step 7 Observe the ODU indicator on the IF board. The ODU indicator should turn off. If the ODUindicator blinks yellow, align the antennas.

Step 8 Tighten all the screws on the antennas.

NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI again to ensure that no fault occurred in the processof tightening the screws.

----End

4.5.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized AntennasWhen aligning dual-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting theazimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends. Engineers also need to adjust the feed boomsof the antennas so that the cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) meets the specifiedrequirements.

Prerequisitel The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link is complete.l The weather at both stations is suitable for outdoor operations and there is no threat of rain,

snow, or fogl On-site conditions meet the requirements for the antennas to operate at a high altitude and

the personnel commissioning the antennas are trained to work at high altitudes.l The Multimeter is calibrated.l The ATPC function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).l The AM function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Adjustable wrenchl Telescopel Interphonel Hex key

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

Page 95: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

l Multimeter (with a BNC connector prepared at one end for future tests)

l North-stabilized indicator

l Spanner delivered with the OMT

Procedure

Step 1 Check the installation modes of the ODUs at both ends of the radio link.

If... Then...

The ODUs are directly installed onto an OMT Proceed to Step 2 through Step 3.

The ODUs are installed separately from the antenna Proceed to Step 4 through Step 14.

Step 2 Adjust the antenna as a single-polarized antenna. For detailed operations, see 4.5.2 AligningSingle-Polarized Antennas.

Step 3 After aligning the antennas, power on the ODUs in the vertical and horizontal polarizationdirections at both ends, and check the XPD.

1. Use the multimeter to measure the received signal levels of the ODUs in the vertical andhorizontal polarization directions.

2. Obtain the received signal level in the horizontal polarization direction (P1) and the receivedsignal level in the vertical polarization direction (P2) based on the curve delivered in theODU carton.

3. Calculate the XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2).

If... Then...

The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) isless than 30 dB.

Release the captive screws of the OMT tosome extent, and turn the OMT slightly untilthe signal level reaches the lower threshold.The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2)should not be less than 30 dB.

The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) isnot less than 30 dB.

The antenna alignment task is completed.

4. Tighten all the screws of the antennas.

NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI. Avoid any fault in the alignment of antennasin the process of tightening the screws.

Step 4 Power off the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and power on thehorizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the antennas transmithorizontally polarized signals.

Step 5 Adjust the azimuth angle and elevation angle of the antennas at both ends by referring to 4.5.2Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas, and ensure that the main lobe of the horizontallypolarized signals is aligned with the antenna.

Step 6 Measure the RSL (P3) of the horizontally polarized signals at the local end.

1. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the horizontally polarizedODU.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

Page 96: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

2. Calculate the RSL (P3) of the horizontally polarized received signals by referring to thecurve diagram delivered along with the ODU.

Step 7 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signalsreaches the lower threshold (P4).

1. Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end.

2. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarizedODU.

3. Calculate the RSL (P4) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagramin the ODU box.

4. Calculate the XPD1 (XPD2 = P3 - P4).

If... Then...

The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) is less than 30 dB Proceed to the next step.

The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) is not less than 30 dB Perform Step 8.

5. Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly untilthe signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD1 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) shouldnot be less than 30 dB.

Step 8 Record the angle (D1) of the current feed boom.

Step 9 Power off the horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and power on thevertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the antennas transmitvertically polarized signals.

Step 10 Measure the RSL (P5) of the vertically polarized signals at the local end by referring to Step6.

Step 11 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signalsreaches the lower threshold (P6).

1. Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end.

2. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarizedODU.

3. Calculate the RSL (P6) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagramdelivered along with the ODU.

4. Calculate the XPD3 (XPD3 = P5 - P6).

If... Then...

The calculated XPD3 (XPD3 = P5 - P6) is less than 30 dB Proceed to the next step.

The calculated XPD3 (XPD3 = P5 - P6) is not less than 30 dB Perform Step 12.

5. Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly untilthe signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) shouldnot be less than 30 dB.

Step 12 Record the angle (D2) of the current feed boom.

Step 13 Adjust the feed boom slightly (ranging from D1 to D2), and ensure that XPD2 and XPD3 arenot less than 30 dB.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

Page 97: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

If D1 and D2 are the same, you do not need to adjust the feed boom.

Step 14 Tighten all the screws on the antennas.

NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI again to ensure that no fault occurred in the processof tightening the screws.

----End

Related Information

In practice, you can align dual-polarized antennas by measuring only the vertically polarizedsignals.

4.6 Checking the Status of Radio LinksAfter aligning the antennas, query the status of radio links and determine whether the radio linksare in the normal state.

Prerequisite

The antennas have been aligned.

Procedure

Step 1 Observe the LINK indicator on the IF board.

STAT

SRV

LINK

ODU

RMT

ACT

1. If the LINK indicator on the IF board is on (green), it indicates that the radio link is in thenormal state.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

Page 98: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

2. If the LINK indicator on the IF board is on (red), check whether the data configuration ofthe ODU is correct and whether the antennas are aligned.

----End

4.7 Querying the DCN StatusThe NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. By querying the radio links using the SearchFor Opposite NE, you can determine whether the DCN of the radio links runs properly.

Prerequisitel The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured.l The antennas have been aligned.l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Communication > SearchFor Opposite NE from the Function Tree.

Step 2 In the Search For Opposite NE tab, click Query.On the Opposite NE List, basic information about opposite NEs in all microwave directions isdisplayed.

NOTE

If basic information about the opposite NEs in a certain microwave direction is not displayed, check theconfigurations in that microwave direction.

----End

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

Page 99: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

5 System Commissioning

About This Chapter

System commissioning includes the specific commissioning processes for all systemcommissioning items.

5.1 Configuring Networkwide Service DataAfter site commissioning is performed for each hop of the radio links, the ECC communicationbetween NEs is normal. In this case, an NE can be accessed by using the U2000, and thenetworkwide service data can be configured.

5.2 Testing E1 ServicesBy testing E1 services, you can check whether the E1 services are available over radio links.

5.3 Testing Ethernet ServicesBy testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available overradio links. The Ethernet services can be tested using the ETH-OAM function. Therefore, notester is required.

5.4 Testing ATM ServicesBy testing ATM services, you can check whether ATM services are available over radio links.The ATM services can be tested using the ATM OAM function. Therefore, no tester is required.

5.5 Testing AM SwitchingBy testing AM switching, you can determine whether the AM switching is normal over radiolinks.

5.6 Testing Protection SwitchingBy testing protection switching, you can determine whether the protection switching is normalover radio links.

5.7 Checking the Clock StatusCheck the clock status for each NE to ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on a radio networkare synchronized.

5.8 Testing the FM over a Radio LinkThe fade margin (FM) over a radio link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors(MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs).

5.9 Testing 24-Hour BER

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

Page 100: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

You can check whether the equipment can transmit services stably for a long term by testing24-hour BER.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

Page 101: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

5.1 Configuring Networkwide Service DataAfter site commissioning is performed for each hop of the radio links, the ECC communicationbetween NEs is normal. In this case, an NE can be accessed by using the U2000, and thenetworkwide service data can be configured.

NOTE

This section only includes the basic configuration tasks related to NEs, TDM services, and clocks. For moreconfiguration tasks, see the configuration guide.

5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search MethodThe U2000 can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP addressof the gateway NE, the IP address range of the gateway NE, or the NSAP addresses. In addition,the U2000 can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method of manuallycreating NEs, this method is faster and more reliable.

Prerequisitel The NMS must have proper communication with NEs.

l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

U2000

Procedure

Step 1 Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Select Transport NE Search tab.

Step 3 Select Search Mode.

NOTE

l If the U2000 server and the gateway NE are in the same network segment, it is recommended that you setSearch Mode to IP auto discovery.

l In other scenarios, it is recommended that you set Search Mode to Search for NE.

If... Then...

Search Mode is set to Search for NE Perform Step 4 to Step 7.

Search Mode is set to IP auto discovery Perform Step 8 to Step 10.

Step 4 If Search Mode is set to Search for NE, you need to add a search domain.

1. Click Add, and then the Input Search Domain dialog box is displayed.

2. Select an address type and enter the search address.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

Page 102: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

l When Address Type is set to NSAP Address, ensure that the OSI protocol stack software is installedon the U2000.

l When Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE, and the U2000server and gateway NE are not in the same network segment, ensure that the IP routes of the networksegments to which the U2000 server and gateway NE belong are configured on the U2000 and relatedrouters.

3. Click OK.

Step 5 Repeat Step 4 to add several search domains.

Step 6 In the Search for NE dialog box, perform the operations described in the Note part.

NOTE

l If Create NE after search is selected, you need to specify NE User and Password.

l You can select either Create NE after search or Upload after Create or both Create NE after search andUpload after Create. In this manner, after the NE searching is complete, the system automatically createsan NE and uploads the NE.

Step 7 Click Next, and then the Transport NE Search dialog box is displayed.After the search is complete, all the NEs that are found are displayed in the Result list.

Step 8 If Search Mode is set to IP auto discovery, enter NE User and Password.

Step 9 Click Next to navigate to the search interface.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

Page 103: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 10 After the NE to be created is displayed in Result, click Stop. In the dialog box that is displayed,click Yes.

Step 11 Create NEs.1. Select an NE that is not created from the Result list.2. Optional: Select the GNE ID of the NE.3. Click Create.

The Create dialog box is displayed.4. Specify User Name and Password.5. Click OK.

The icon of the created NE is displayed in the Main Topology.

Step 12 Optional: Repeat Step 11 to create other NEs that are not created.

----End

Related ReferencesA.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching

5.1.2 Changing the NE IDChange the NE ID according to the engineering plan to guarantee that each NE ID is unique.This operation task does not interrupt services.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Procedure

Step 1 In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed.

Step 2 Choose Object Attributes.The Attribute dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click the NE Attribute[xxx] tab.

NOTE

xxx indicates the current name of the NE.

Step 4 Click Modify NE ID.The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Specify New ID and New Extended ID.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

Page 104: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 6 Click OK.A dialog box is displayed for confirmation, click OK.

Step 7 Click OK.

----End

Related ReferencesA.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs

5.1.3 Changing the NE NameTo better identify the NE in the Main Topology, name the NE according to the NE geographicallocation or the device connected to the NE.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

ProcedureStep 1 In the Main Topology, select the NE whose name is to be changed.

Step 2 Right-click on this NE, and then choose Object Attributes from the shortcut menu. TheAttributes dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click the NE Attribute [xxx] tab.NOTE

xxx is the current name of the NE.

Step 4 Enter the name of the NE in Name.NOTE

The name of an NE cannot contain any space or characters.

Step 5 Click OK. Close the dialog box indicating the operation result.The new name of the NE is displayed below the NE icon in the Main Topology.

----End

5.1.4 Setting NE Communication ParametersThe communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE, the gateway IPaddress, and the subnet mask.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

Page 105: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

U2000

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE.

Step 3 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box.

NOTEIf configuring multiple parameters, click Apply for each instance.

----End

Related ReferencesA.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting

5.1.5 Configuring the Logical BoardIf the logical board corresponding to the physical board is not added in the slot layout, add thelogical board in the slot layout. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in theslot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

Page 106: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.l All the boards must be installed correctly.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Procedure

Step 1 Double-click the NE icon to open the NE layout diagram.

Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added, right-click, and then choose AddXXX.

NOTE

XXX is the name of the board to be added.

Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted, right-click, and then choose Delete.

1. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click OK.2. In the dialog box that is displayed again for confirmation, click OK.

NOTE

Before deleting the board, delete the data, such as the service, clock, orderwire, and protection, on theboard.

----End

5.1.6 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection GroupIf the radio link requires 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, create the IF 1+1 protection group.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

Page 107: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the

NE Panel.l The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in two paired slots.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Background InformationWhen a 1+0 service is converted into a 1+1 HSB protection configuration by configuring the IF1+1 protection group, the original service is not interrupted. The board that carries the originalservice, however, needs to be set as the working board.

Procedure

Step 1 For an IF 1+1 protection group comprised of ISU2 or ISX2 boards, set IF Service Type toappropriate values for the main and standby IF boards according to the network plan.

NOTE

l Ensure that the values of IF Service Type set for the main and standby IF boards are the same and meet thenetwork plan requirements.

l For ISU2 or ISX2 boards, the default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > LinkConfiguration from the Function Tree.

2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.3. Changes the values of IF Service Type for the main and standby IF boards according to

the network plan.4. Click Apply.

Step 2 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1Protection from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Click Create.The Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Configure the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

Page 108: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for theIF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection.

l When Working Mode is set to FD, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing betweenthem, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two receivedsignals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced.

l When Working Mode is set to SD, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance betweenthem, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. WithSD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced.

l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases theswitching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after theformer working channel is restored to normal. It is recommended that you set this parameter toRevertive Mode.

l When Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the currentstate unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restoredto normal.

l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. It is recommendedthat you use the default value.

l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.

l Generally, if Working Mode is set to HSB, it is recommended that you set Enable ReverseSwitching to Disabled; if Working Mode is set to SD, it is recommended that you set Enable ReverseSwitching to Enabled.

l Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s) andEnable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

l It is recommended that you set Alarm Report Mode to Only protection group alarms. In this case,protection group alarms are reported to indicate radio link faults.

l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time(s) take its default value.

Step 5 Click OK. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.

----End

Related ReferencesA.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create

5.1.7 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio LinkBy performing this operation, you can configure the IF/ODU information for a radio link.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the

NE Panel.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Precautionsl For 1+1 HSB/SD protection, you need to configure only the IF/ODU information of the

main radio link.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

Page 109: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

l For 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the main radiolink and the ODU information of the standby radio link.

l Before configuring XPIC workgroups, you need to set IF Service Type separately for IFboards in the vertical polarization and those in horizontal polarization.

l For N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio linksrespectively.

l The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported, if the E1 count, AM enabled status, STM-1count, or modulation mode is set inconsistently for both ends of an Integrated IP radio link.This alarm should be cleared immediately. Otherwise, services may be configuredunsuccessfully or interrupted.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration fromthe Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon.The system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link that the IF board or ODUconnected to the IF board belongs to.

Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link.1. Optional: For ISU2/ISX2 boards, set IF Service Type according to the network plan. Click

Apply.

NOTE

l After this operation, the IF board will be reset. Set other IF information after the IF board starts up.

l For ISU2 and ISX2 boards, set IF Service Type appropriately for the ISU2 and ISX2 boards beforeconfiguring IF 1+1 protection, N+1 protection, and XPIC.

2. Set other IF information.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

Page 110: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

l Link ID is set according to the network plan. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID,and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.

l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme.In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode.

l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation schemeaccording to the channel conditions.

l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order modulation schemethat the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the valueof this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensureand the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.

l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-order modulation scheme that theAM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of thisparameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybridradio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.

l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the GuaranteeAM Capacity.

Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.

NOTE

l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly usedin the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antennamisalignment indicating function.

l When Power to Be Received(dBm) takes the default value (-10.0), the antenna misalignmentindicating function is disabled.

l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set TX Status to unmute.

Step 7 Click Apply.

----End

Related ReferencesA.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

5.1.8 Configuring ATPC AttributesTo configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.l The corresponding IF board must be added on the NE Panel.

Precautionsl For the IF boards that are configured with 1+1 protection, configure only the ATPC

attributes of the main IF board.l The following procedure describes the ATPC parameter configurations in the IF port

configuration dialog box for the IF board. You can also configure ATPC parameters in theCreate XPIC Protection Group window.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

Page 111: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Procedure

Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the ATPC Attributes tab.

Step 3 Set the parameters of ATPC attributes.

NOTE

l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link.

l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended thatyou set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled.

l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically usesthe preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link.

l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPCUpper Automatic Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm).

l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central valuebetween the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC LowerThreshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upperthreshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

5.1.9 Synchronizing the NE TimeBy setting the NE time to be synchronous with the time on the NMS or standard NTP server,you can record the exact time when alarms and abnormal events occur.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NMS server, the time zone

and time must be set correctly on the PC or server running the NMS software.l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, the time on

the NTP server must be set correctly and the NTP protocol must be normal.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from theMain Menu.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

Page 112: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 2 Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.

Step 3 In the physical view, select the NE whose time needs to be synchronized, and then click

.

Step 4 After the operation is complete, a dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation issuccessful. Click Close.

Step 5 When you need to synchronize the NE time with the NMS time, set the time synchronizationmode and the related parameters.

1. Optional: The NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.

a. Right-click the NE whose time needs to be synchronized, and then chooseSynchronize with NM Time from the shortcut menu.

b. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes.

c. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.

2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM.

3. Click Apply.

4. Optional: Set auto synchronization parameters.

a. Set auto synchronization parameters.

b. Click Apply.

c. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes.

d. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.

NOTE

l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the NMS time, set Synchronous Mode to NM.

l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, set Synchronous Mode toStandard NTP. Configure Standard NTP Authentication according to the requirements of the NTP server.

Step 6 When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, set the timesynchronization mode and the related parameters.

1. Set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP.

2. Configure Standard NTP Authentication according to the requirements of the NTPserver.

3. Click Apply.

4. Click Close. The dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result is closed.

5. Configure the upper-layer NTP server.

a. Select the NE, right-click in the configuration box where the standard NTP server isconfigured, and then choose New.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

Page 113: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

b. Configure the parameters related to the NTP server.

c. Click Apply.d. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.

6. Optional: Copy the configuration of the upper-layer NTP server.

NOTEBefore the copy operation, set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP for the source NE and the targetNE.

a. Select the NE to be copied, right-click, and then choose Copy Standard NTPServer.

b. Select the NE to be pasted, right-click, and then choose Paste Standard NTPServer.

c. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes.d. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.

----End

Related ReferencesA.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

Page 114: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

A.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

5.1.10 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point ServicesIn a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one servicesink.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.l The corresponding source and sink boards must be added on NE Panel.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH ServiceConfiguration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-connection.

Step 3 Click Create.The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Configure the parameters of a new SDH service.

Step 5 Click OK. Close the displayed dialog box.

----End

Related ReferencesA.13 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

Page 115: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

5.1.11 Configuring the Clock SourcesThis topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned clocksynchronization scheme to ensure that all the NEs on the network trace the same clock.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

ProcedureStep 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >

Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.

Step 2 Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.

Step 3 Click Create.The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Select the clock sources.TIP

Hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard to select multiple clock sources.

Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 Optional: Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to add other clock sources.

Step 7 Optional: Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority of thisclock source.

NOTE

The clock priorities levels are arranged in a descending order from the first row to the last row. The internalclock source is always of the lowest priority.

Step 8 Optional: Set External Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for the externalclock sources.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

Page 116: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 9 Click Apply.

----End

Related ReferencesA.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table

5.1.12 Configuring OrderwireThe orderwire for an NE provides a dedicated communication channel that the networkmaintenance personnel can use.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

U2000

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwirefrom the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the General tab.

Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Optional: Change the overhead bytes occupied by the orderwire.1. Click the Advanced tab.2. Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

Page 117: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

3. Click Apply.

----End

Related ReferencesA.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_GeneralA.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

5.2 Testing E1 ServicesBy testing E1 services, you can check whether the E1 services are available over radio links.

NOTE

l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions, where the AMfunction works in the highest-efficiency modulation mode.

l The tested E1 services can be Native E1 services or CES E1 services.

5.2.1 Testing E1 Services by Using a BER TesterIf a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test E1 services.

PrerequisiteThe NE must be configured with E1 services, and the E1 services must be transmitted throughthe DDF.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl U2000l BER tester

NOTE

For a test of CES services in CESoPSN mode, a BER tester supporting Nx64 Kbit/s timeslot setting isnecessary.

Procedure

Step 1 On the DDF at the central site, connect the BER tester to the first E1 port of the IDU.

The BER tester indicates the AIS alarm.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

Page 118: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Figure 5-1 Connecting the BER tester

RX TXDDF

1234....

RX TX

BER tester

Step 2 On the NMS, perform an inloop for the corresponding E1 port at the remote site.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.7. Click OK.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.8. Click Close.

Step 3 Test the bit errors for two minutes.There should be no bit errors.

NOTE

For a test of CES services, it is necessary to configure 64 Kbit/s timeslots on a BER tester to align with thetimeslots carrying CES services.

Step 4 Release the inloop set in Step 2.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.7. Click OK.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

Page 119: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

8. Click Close.

Step 5 Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 to test all other E1 ports.

----End

5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBSIf no BER tester is available, you can test E1 services by using the PRBS test system embeddedin the equipment.

Prerequisitel The NE must be configured with E1 services, and the E1 services must be transmitted

through the DDF.l The communication between the NMS and the NE must be normal.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Precautions

CAUTIONl When a PRBS test is performed, the services carried on the tested path are interrupted.l The PRBS test can be performed only in a unidirectional manner and on one path at a time.l CES services do not support a PRBS test.

Procedure

Step 1 On the NMS, perform an inloop for the corresponding E1 port at the remote site.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.7. Click OK.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.8. Click Close.

Step 2 At the central site, on the NMS, select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

Step 3 In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PRBS Test.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

Page 120: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 4 Select the first E1 port, and then set the following PRBS-related parameters:l Direction: Crossl Duration: a value from 120 to 180l Measured in Time: seconds

Step 5 Click Start to Test.The system displays a dialog box indicating The operation may interrupt the service, are yousure to continue?

Step 6 Click OK.

Step 7 When the Progress column is 100%, click Query to check the test result.The curve diagram should be green.

Step 8 Release the inloop set in Step 1.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.7. Click OK.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.8. Click Close.

Step 9 Repeat Step 1 through Step 8 to test all other E1 ports.

----End

5.3 Testing Ethernet ServicesBy testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available overradio links. The Ethernet services can be tested using the ETH-OAM function. Therefore, notester is required.

PrerequisiteEthernet services must be configured.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

Page 121: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions when the AMfunction works in the highest-efficiency modulation mode.

l The tested Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services, EoS/EoPDH services, or Ethernet servicescarried by PWs.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Test Connection DiagramThe following test procedure considers the Ethernet service from PORT2 on NE2 and PORT3on NE3 to PORT1 on NE1 as an example, as shown in Figure 5-2.The three Ethernet ports arenot on the EMS6/EFP8 boards.

Figure 5-2 Networking diagram for testing Ethernet services

NE 1

NE 2 PORT 2

NE 3PORT 3

PORT 1

VLAN ID=100

VLAN ID=200

Microwave network

The VLAN ID of the Ethernet service from NE2 to NE1 is 100, and the VLAN ID of the Ethernetservice from NE3 to NE1 is 200.

NOTE

If the Ethernet ports are on the EMS6/EFP8 boards, you can still perform the following steps to test theEthernet services by eliminating the need to set up the remote maintenance end point. In addition, theoperations on the NMS are different. For details, see Creating MDs, Creating MAs, Creating MPs, andPerforming an LB Test.

Procedure

Step 1 Configure the maintenance domains of NE1, NE2, and NE3.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet

OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.

The New Maintenance Domain dialog box is displayed.3. Configure the parameters of the new maintenance domains.

l Maintenance Domain Name: MD1 for NE1, NE2, and NE3

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

Page 122: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

l Maintenance Domain Level: 4 for NE1, NE2, and NE3

NOTE

The maintenance domain names and the maintenance domain levels of the NEs must be the same.

4. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

Step 2 Configure the maintenance associations of NE1, NE2, and NE3.

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > EthernetOAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.Choose New > New Maintenance Association.The New Maintenance Association dialog box is displayed.

3. Configure the parameters of the new maintenance associations.

l Maintenance Association Name: MA1 for NE1, NE2, and NE3

l Relevant Service: services from NE1 to NE2 and NE3

NOTE

Click in Relevant Service, and select associated services in the New MaintenanceAssociation dialog box.

4. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

Step 3 Configure the MEPs of NE1, NE2, and NE3.

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > EthernetOAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.

3. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >New MEP Point.The system displays the New MEP Point dialog box.

4. Configure the parameters of the new MEPs.

l MP ID: 101 for NE1, 102 for NE2, and 103 for NE3

l Direction: Ingress for NE1, NE2, and NE3

l CC Status: activation for NE1, NE2, and NE3

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

Page 123: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

5. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

Step 4 Configure the remote MEPs for the maintenance associations of NE1, NE2, and NE3.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet

OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.3. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. The Manage Remote MEP Point dialog

box is displayed.4. Click New.

Then, the Add Maintenance Association Remote Maintenance Point dialog box isdisplayed.

5. Set the parameters of the new remote MEPs.l Remote Maintenance Point ID: 102 and 103 for NE1, and 101 for NE2 and NE3

NOTE

Set the Remote Maintenance Point ID of NE1 to the MP ID of NE2 and NE3, and set theRemote Maintenance Point ID of NE2 and NE3 to the MP ID of NE1.

6. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

Step 5 Test the availability of the Ethernet services from NE1 to NE2 and NE3.1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of the NE1, and then choose

Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM.2. Select the MD, MA, and MEP that correspond to Port 1, click OAM.3. Select Start LB.

The LB Test window is displayed.4. Select Destination Maintenance Point ID, and set the parameters in Test Node.

l Source Maintenance Point ID: 101 (maintenance point ID of NE1)l Destination Maintenance Point ID: 102 (maintenance point ID of NE2)l Transmitted Packet Count: 20 (recommended)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

Page 124: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

l Transmitted Packet Length: 64 (64 is a recommended value, and the parameter canalso be set to 128, 256, 512, 1024, and 1280 for testing the Ethernet services of differentpacket lengths.)

NOTE

The maximum Packet Length is 1400.

l Transmitted Packet Priority: 7 (recommended)

5. Click Start Test.6. Check Detection Result.

The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.

7. Repeat Step 5.4 to Step 5.6 to test the Ethernet services from NE1 to NE3.l Source Maintenance Point ID: 101 (maintenance point ID of NE1)l Destination Maintenance Point ID: 103 (maintenance point ID of NE3)l Transmitted Packet Count: 20 (recommended)l Transmitted Packet Length: 64 (recommended)l Transmitted Packet Priority: 7 (recommended)The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.

----End

5.4 Testing ATM ServicesBy testing ATM services, you can check whether ATM services are available over radio links.The ATM services can be tested using the ATM OAM function. Therefore, no tester is required.

Prerequisitel End-to-end ATM services must be configured.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

Page 125: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Background InformationWhen an LB test is performed on the ATM service, the segment and end attribute is set to specifythe types of transmitted ATM OAM cells.

l When Segment End Attribute is set to Segment point, segment LB cells are transmitted.l When Segment End Attribute is set to Endpoint, end-to-end LB cells are transmitted.

Test Connection DiagramThis example shows how to test the ATM service over a radio link hop. The method for testingthe ATM services over multiple radio link hops is the same. Figure 5-3 shows the test connectiondiagram. NE A and NE B are the OptiX RTN 950.

The services of the boards on the NE1 and NE2 are configured as follows:

Attribute NE A NE B

UNI Service source 3-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) 3-MD1-1 (Trunk-1)

Bound port 3-MD1-1 (Port-1)3-MD1-2 (Port-2)

3-MD1-1 (Port-1)3-MD1-2 (Port-2)

VPI 1 101

VCI 51 501

NNI PW ID 1 1

Service source - -

Bound port - -

VPI 101 101

VCI 501 501

Figure 5-3 Connection diagram for testing the connectivity of the ATM service

NE BNE ANodeB RNC

UNI NNI NNI UNIVPI VCI101 501

VPI VCI101 501

VPI VCI101 501

VPI VCI1 51

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

Page 126: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Procedure

Step 1 Set the segment and end attributes of the ATM services on the NE A and NE B.1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM

Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Segment and End Attribute tab, and choose the ATM service to be tested.3. As for NE A and NE B, set Segment and End Attribute to Segment point.4. As for NE A and NE B, set Connection Direction to Sink.5. Click Apply.

Step 2 Set the identifier at the loopback point from NE A to NE B.1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM

Management from the Function Tree. Click the LLID tab.2. Set Country Code, Network Code, and NE Code.

Set the parameters of NE A as follows:l Set Country Code to 00 86.l Set Network Code to 00 16.l Set NE Code to 00 09 78 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00.Set the parameters of NE B as follows:l Set Country Code to 00 86.l Set Network Code to 00 16.l Set NE Code to 00 09 78 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00.

NOTE

If the default LLID is unique on a network, the default LLID can also be used.

3. Click Apply.4. Click Close.

Step 3 Test the ATM service from NE A to NE B.1. In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM

Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Remote Loopback Test tab, and choose the ATM service to be tested.3. Set Loopback Point NE of the ATM service to be tested to NE B.4. Click Test to start an LB test.5. In normal situations, Test Result should be Test succeeded.

If the test is not successful, see Maintenance Guide and rectify the fault based on the testresult.

Step 4 Test the ATM service from NE B to NE A.1. With reference of Step 1, set Connection Direction of NE A to Sink; set Connection

Direction of NE B to Source.2. Select NE B from the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > ATM OAM

Management from the Function Tree.3. Click the Remote Loopback Test tab, and choose the ATM service to be tested.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

Page 127: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

4. Set Loopback Point NE of the ATM service to be tested to NE B.5. Click Test to start an LB test.6. In normal situations, Test Result should be Test succeeded.

If the test is not successful, see Maintenance Guide and rectify the fault based on the testresult.

----End

5.5 Testing AM SwitchingBy testing AM switching, you can determine whether the AM switching is normal over radiolinks.

5.5.1 Testing AM Switching by Using a BER TesterIf a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test AM switching.

Prerequisitel The antennas have been aligned.l The radio links must be the Integrated IP radio links for which the AM function is enabled.l The E1 service must be configured.l The weather is favorable.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl U2000l BER tester

PrecautionsThe following test procedure uses the E1 services between NEs as an example.

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the BER tester to an E1 port on the local NE.

NOTE

Test the E1 services with the highest priority, which are not discarded in the lowest-order modulation mode.

Step 2 On the remote NE, perform an inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

Page 128: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

7. Click OK.The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

8. Click Close.

Step 3 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE.

1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IFInterface from the Function Tree.

2. Click the IF Attributes tab.

3. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Disable, and set Manually Modulation Mode tothe same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

4. Click Apply.

Step 4 Query the AM working status on the local NE.

1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IFInterface from the Function Tree.

2. Click the IF Attributes tab.

3. Click Query.Transmit-End Modulation Mode should be Manually Modulation Mode of a pre-setvalue.

Step 5 Use the BER tester to test the bit errors.The test result should show that no bit error occurs.

Step 6 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute to the planned values on the local NE.

1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IFInterface from the Function Tree.

2. Click the IF Attributes tab.

3. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Enable, and set Modulation Mode of theGuarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to the plannedvalues.

4. Click Apply.

Step 7 Query the AM working status on the local NE.

1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IFInterface from the Function Tree.

2. Click the IF Attributes tab.

3. Click Query.Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Modulation Mode of the Full AMCapacity of a preset value.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

Page 129: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

When adverse weather prevails, the current modulation mode may be lower than the value ofModulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity.

Step 8 Check the BER test result.There should be no bit errors.

Step 9 Release the inloop set in Step 2.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.7. Click OK.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.8. Click Close.

----End

5.5.2 Testing AM Switching Without a BER TesterIf no BER tester is available, you can test AM switching by querying the bit errors over radiolinks.

Prerequisitel The antennas have been aligned.l The radio links must be the Integrated IP radio links for which the AM function is enabled.l The weather is favorable.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Procedure

Step 1 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE.1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF

Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF Attributes tab.3. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Disable, and set Manually Modulation Mode to

the same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.4. Click Apply.

Step 2 Query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board on the local NE.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

Page 130: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

1. Select the desired IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer.2. In the Function Tree, choose Performance > Current Performance.3. In Monitored Object Filter Criteria, select All.4. Set Monitor Period to 15-Minute.5. In Count, select FEC Performance. In Display Options, select Display Zero Data and

Display Continuous Severely Errored Seconds.6. Click Query, and then close the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

In performance events, the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT should be 0. If thevalue is not 0, choose Reset on the performance register to clear the existing performancevalues.

Step 3 Query the AM working status on the local NE.1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF

Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF Attributes tab.3. Click Query.

Transmit-End Modulation Mode should be Manually Modulation Mode of a pre-setvalue.

Step 4 Reset the performance event register.1. Select the desired IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer.2. In the Function Tree, choose Performance > Current Performance.3. Click Reset.

The confirmation dialog box is displayed.4. Click Yes.5. Click Close.

Step 5 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute to the planned values on the local NE.1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF

Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF Attributes tab.3. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Enable, and set Modulation Mode of the

Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to the plannedvalues.

4. Click Apply.

Step 6 Repeat Step 2. Wait for a period, and query the 15-minute performance value of the IF boardon the local NE.In performance events, the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT should be 0.

Step 7 Query the AM working status on the local NE.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

Page 131: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IFInterface from the Function Tree.

2. Click the IF Attributes tab.

3. Click Query.Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Modulation Mode of the Full AMCapacity of a preset value.

NOTE

When adverse weather prevails, the current modulation mode may be lower than the value ofModulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity.

----End

5.6 Testing Protection SwitchingBy testing protection switching, you can determine whether the protection switching is normalover radio links.

5.6.1 Testing IF 1+1 SwitchingYou can verify whether the IF 1+1 protection function is in the normal state by checking theworking board of the IF 1+1 protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisitel The antennas have been aligned.

l The equipment is configured with IF 1+1 protection.

l E1 services are configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl U2000

l BER tester

Test Connection Diagram

Figure 5-4 Configuration for testing IF 1+1 switching

NE A and NE B are configured as follows:

l Main IF board: ISU2 in slot 3

l Standby IF board: ISU2 in slot 5

l Main ODU: ODU in slot 23

l Standby ODU: ODU in slot 25

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

Page 132: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NE BNE A

As shown in Figure 5-4, the following procedures use the E1 services between NE A and NEB that are configured with 1+1 HSB protection as an example.

NOTE

l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to HSB, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODUon the main channel of NE A, and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Enable. The switching occursat NE A.

l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to SD, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU onthe main channel of NE A, and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Enable. The switching occursat NE A.

l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to FD, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU onthe main channel of NE B. The switching occurs at NE A.

PrecautionsNOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Active Board of Device or Active Boardof Channel in Protection Group before and after the protection switching.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 through Step 11.

No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 6 through Step 10.

Step 2 On NE A at the central site, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.

Step 3 On NE B at the remote site, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.7. Click OK.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

Page 133: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.8. Click Close.

Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester.The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur.

Step 5 Set Enable Reverse Switching in the 1+1 HSB protection group for NE A.1. Select the desired NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose

Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.2. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and set Enable Reverse

Switching to Enable.3. Click Apply.4. Click Close.

Step 6 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose

Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.2. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and click Query.3. In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the main IF board

3-ISU2.

Step 7 Set TX Status to Mute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose

Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute.4. Click Apply.

Step 8 Check service availability after the switching.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. Itshould show that the services are restored aftertransient interruption.

No BER tester is available on site, and theE1 services are transmitted on the radiolink

Refer to 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services UsingPRBS to test availability of the E1 services.

No BER tester is available on site, and theEthernet services are transmitted on theradio link

Refer to 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to testavailability of the Ethernet services.

Step 9 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose

Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.2. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and click Query.3. In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the standby IF board

5-ISU2.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

Page 134: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 10 Set TX Status to Unmute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose

Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.4. Click Apply.

Step 11 Release the software inloop set in Step 3.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.7. Click OK.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.8. Click Close.

Step 12 Restore the setting of Enable Reverse Switching in Step 5.1. Select the desired NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose

Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.2. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and set Enable Reverse

Switching to Disable.3. Click Apply.4. Click Close.

----End

5.6.2 Testing N+1 Protection SwitchingYou can verify whether the IF N+1 protection function works normally by checking the workingboard of the IF N+1 protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisitel The antennas have been aligned.l The equipment must be configured with the N+1 protection.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl U2000l BER tester

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

Page 135: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Test Connection Diagram

Figure 5-5 Configuration for testing N+1 protection switching

NE A and NE B are configured as follows:l Main IF boards: ISU2 in slot 3 and ISU2 in slot 5l Standby IF board: ISU2 in slot 4l Main ODUs: ODU in slot 23 and ODU in slot 25l Standby ODU: ODU in slot 24

NE BNE A

As shown in Figure 5-5, the following procedures consider the E1 services between NE A andNE B that are configured with the N+1 (N=2) configuration as an example.

PrecautionsNOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Switching Status in Slot MappingRelation before and after the protection switching.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 to Step 10.

No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 5 to Step 9.

Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.

Step 3 At the remote site NE B, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

Page 136: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

7. Click OK.The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

8. Click Close.

Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester.The BER tester should show that no bit error occurs.

Step 5 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE B.

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE B, and then chooseConfiguration > N+1 protection from the Function Tree.

2. Select the ID of the protection group to be queried, and then click Query.

3. In Slot Mapping Relation, Switching Status of the working units 3-ISU2-1 and 5-ISU2-1 and the protection unit 4-ISU2-1 should be Normal.

NOTE

If a fault arises, you must rectify the fault and then proceed with the N+1 protection testing.

Step 6 Set TX Status to Mute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A.

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and chooseConfiguration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute.

4. Click Apply.

Step 7 Check service availability after the switching.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. Itshould show that the services are restored aftera transient interruption.

No BER tester is available on site, and theE1 services are transmitted on the radiolink.

See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBSto test availability of the E1 services.

No BER tester is available on site, and theEthernet services are transmitted on theradio link.

See 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to testavailability of the Ethernet service.

Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE B.

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE B, and then chooseConfiguration > N+1 protection from the Function Tree.

2. Select the ID of the protection group to be queried, and then click Query.

3. In Slot Mapping Relation, the Switching Status of the working unit 3-ISU2-1 for theservice that is configured with the N+1 protection should be SF.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

Page 137: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 9 Set TX Status to Unmute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose

Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.4. Click Apply.

Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.7. Click OK.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.8. Click Close.

----End

5.6.3 Testing SNCP SwitchingYou can verify whether SNCP works normally by checking the working port of the SNCPprotection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisitel The antennas have been aligned.

l The equipment is configured with the SNCP.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl U2000

l BER tester

Test Connection Diagram

As shown in Figure 5-6, the following procedures consider the E1 services between NE A andNE C that are configured with SNCP as an example. Figure 5-6 shows a network composed ofradio links, and the test procedures are similar in the case of a network composed of optical fiberlinks.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

Page 138: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Figure 5-6 Configuration for testing SNCP switching

NE A and NE C are configured as follows:l West IF board: ISU2 in slot 3l East IF board: ISU2 in slot 4l West ODU: ODU in slot 23l East ODU: ODU in slot 24

NE A

Working SNCProtecting SNC

NE B

NE C

NE D

PrecautionsNOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Active Channel in Working Service beforean d after the protection switching.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 through Step 10.

No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 5 through Step 9.

Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.

Step 3 At the remote site NE C, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

Page 139: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.7. Click OK.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.8. Click Close.

Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester.The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur.

Step 5 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE C.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE C, and choose

Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.2. In Working Service, select an SNCP service that is already created, then click Function,

and finally select Query Switching Status.3. The current SNCP status of the equipment is displayed in Working Service and Protection

Service.In Current Status, Normal should be displayed. In Active Channel, WorkingChannel should be displayed.

Step 6 Set TX Status to Mute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose

Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute.4. Click Apply.

Step 7 Check service availability after the switching.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. Itshould show that the services are restored aftera transient interruption.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

Page 140: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

If... Then...

No BER tester is available on site, and theE1 services are transmitted on the radiolink.

See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBSto test availability of the E1 services.

Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE C.

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE C, and chooseConfiguration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.

2. Click Function, and then select Query Switching Status.

3. The current SNCP status of the equipment is displayed in Working Service and ProtectionService.In Current Status, the service switching mode is displayed. In Active Channel,Protection Channel should be displayed.

Step 9 Set TX Status to Unmute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A.

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and chooseConfiguration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.

4. Click Apply.

Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3.

1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

5. Click Apply.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6. Click OK.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

7. Click OK.The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

8. Click Close.

----End

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

Page 141: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

5.6.4 Testing ERPS SwitchingYou can verify whether the ERPS function is in the normal state by checking the port status ofthe ERPS protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisitel The equipment is configured with ERPS.l The network cable for carrying the working and protection Ethernet services of ERPS is

properly connected.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Test Connection DiagramAs shown in Figure 5-7, the following procedures use the Ethernet services that are configuredwith ERPS between NE A and NE D as an example. The RPL owner node is NE D.

Figure 5-7 Configuration for testing ERPS

NE A, NE B, NE C, and NE D are configured as follows:l West IF board: ISU2 in slot 3l East IF board: ISU2 in slot 5l West ODU: ODU in slot 23l East ODU: ODU in slot 25

Working channel

NE BProtection channelWest

East

West

West

East

East

East

West

NE A

NE C

NE D

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

Page 142: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Procedure

Step 1 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and choose

Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.2. Select the ERPS protection group to be queried, and click Query.3. The value of State Machine Status should be Idle.

Step 2 Refer to 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet services.The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.

Step 3 Set TX Status to Mute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose

Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute.4. Click Apply.

Step 4 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and choose

Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.2. Select the ERPS protection group to be queried, and click Query.3. The value of State Machine Status should be Protection.

Step 5 Refer to 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet services.The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.

Step 6 Set TX Status to Unmute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose

Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.4. Click Apply.

----End

5.6.5 Testing MPLS APS Protection SwitchingBy checking the change in the status of MPLS tunnels before and after the MPLS APS switching,you can verify whether the MPLS APS protection function is normal.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

Page 143: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Prerequisitel The MPLS tunnel protection group must be created properly.l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Background Information1:1 protection

In normal situations, services are transmitted in the working tunnel. That is, services aretransmitted and received in a different tunnel respectively. When the working tunnel is faulty,the equipment at the transmit end transmits services through the protection tunnel, and theequipment at the receive end receive services through the protection tunnel after a negotiationthrough the APS protocol. Therefore, service switching is realized.

Test Connection DiagramFigure 5-8 shows the connection diagram for testing MPLS APS protection switching. NE Aand NE B are the OptiX RTN 950 NEs.

Figure 5-8 Connection diagram for testing the MPLS APS protection

Protection Tunnel

Working Tunnel

NE A NE B

Procedure

Step 1 Query the switching status of the current MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection group on NE A and NEB.1. In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection

Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab, right-click the tested protection group, and then

choose Query Switching Status from the shortcut menu, to check the MPLS protectiongroup configured on the NE.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

Page 144: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

3. Choose the protection group for switching, and check its switching status. In normalsituations, the switching status should be Normal.

Step 2 Switch the services to the protection tunnel manually and forcedly.

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS ProtectionManagement from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching.

3. Right-click the tested protection group, and then choose Forced Switching from theshortcut menu.

NOTE

l Forced switching: With the highest priority, the operation is performed no matter whether thecurrent status of the protection tunnel is normal.

l Manual switching: The operation is performed only when the status of the protection tunnel isnormal.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

4. Click OK.The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

5. Click Close.

Step 3 Query the switching status of the MPLS 1:1 protection groups on NE A and NE B after theswitching.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

Page 145: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS ProtectionManagement from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching.3. Right-click the tested protection group and then choose Query Switching Status from the

shortcut menu, to check Switching Status of the tunnel protection group.In normal situations, the switching status should be Forced Switching.

4. Query Active Tunnel of the tunnel protection group.In normal situation, Working should be Standby, and Protection should be Active.

NOTE

l If Forced Switching is performed at the previous step, the state of the protection group should beForced Switching.

l If Manual Switching to Protection is performed at the previous step, the state of the protection groupshould be Manual (Working to Protection) Switching.

Step 4 Restore the services on NE A and NE B to the working tunnel.1. In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection

Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching.3. Right-click the tested protection group and then choose Clear from the shortcut menu.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.4. Click OK.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.5. Click Close.6. Click Query.

Services is restored to the working tunnel.

----End

5.6.6 Testing Linear MSP SwitchingYou can verify whether the linear MSP group works normally by checking the working port ofthe linear MSP group before and after the switching.

Prerequisitel The equipment must be configured with linear MSP.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

Page 146: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

l The working and protection optical fibers of the linear MSP are connected properly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl U2000l BER tester

Test Connection DiagramFigure 5-9 shows linear MSP composed of the OptiX RTN equipment through the connectionof optical fibers. The following procedures consider the E1 services from NE A to NE B as anexample.

Figure 5-9 Configuration for testing linear MSP switching

NE A NE B

Protection channel

Working channel

PrecautionsNOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of West Switching Status in Slot MappingRelation before and after the protection switching.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 to Step 10.

No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 5 to Step 9.

Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.

Step 3 At the remote site NE B, perform a software inloop at the corresponding E1 port by using theNMS.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

Page 147: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

6. Click OK.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

7. Click OK.The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

8. Click Close.

Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur.If bit errors occur, see the Maintenance Guide for handling the bit errors.

Step 5 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then chooseConfiguration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.

2. In Slot Mapping Relation, select Working Unit.3. Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status.

In Slot Mapping Relation, the value of West Switching Status should be Idle.

NOTE

In the case of the working and protection units of the services that are configured with the linear MSP, thevalues of West Switching Status should be Idle. If a fault arises, you must rectify the fault and proceedwith the linear MSP switching testing.

Step 6 Shut down the laser for the working unit on NE A.

1. Select the required optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NEA.

2. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select By Function and then select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.

4. Select the laser port that corresponds to the working unit, and then set Laser Switch toClose.

5. Click Apply.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6. Click OK.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

7. Click OK.The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

8. Click Close.

Step 7 Check service availability after the switching.

If... Then...

The BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. Itshould show that the services are restored aftera transient interruption.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

Page 148: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

If... Then...

No BER tester is available on site, and theE1 services are transmitted on the opticalfiber link.

See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBSto test availability of the E1 services.

Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose

Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.2. In Slot Mapping Relation, select Working Unit.3. Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status.

In Slot Mapping Relation, the value of West Switching Status should be Switch uponsignal failure.

NOTE

In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive or Non-Revertive. In the caseof the 1:N linear MSP, Revertive Mode is always set to Revertive.

l After the automatic switching occurs on the equipment, the services are restored. If RevertiveMode is set to Revertive for the linear MSP, the change in values of West Switching Status andProtected Unit can be queried after the WTR time expires.

l After the automatic switching occurs on the equipment, the services are restored. If RevertiveMode is set to Non-Revertive for the linear MSP, stop and then start the MSP protocol to restore thevalue of West Switching Status to Idle.

Step 9 Turn on the laser for the working unit on NE A.1. Select the required optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE

A.2. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.3. Select By Function and then select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.4. Select the laser port that corresponds to the working unit, and then set Laser Switch to

Open.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.7. Click OK.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.8. Click Close.

Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

Page 149: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

5. Click Apply.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6. Click OK.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

7. Click OK.The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

8. Click Close.

----End

5.7 Checking the Clock StatusCheck the clock status for each NE to ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on a radio networkare synchronized.

PrerequisiteThe clock configuration is complete. The link that transmits clocks is in the normal state.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Clock >Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query.

NOTE

l If the clock of an NE is selected as the working clock of the radio network, this clock should be in free-run mode and the clocks of the other NEs should be in locked mode.

l If a service clock or an external clock is selected as the working clock of the radio network, the clocksof all the NEs should be in locked mode.

Step 3 Repeat Step 1 through Step 2 to check the working modes of the other NEs on the radio network.

----End

5.8 Testing the FM over a Radio LinkThe fade margin (FM) over a radio link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors(MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs).

Prerequisitel The weather is favorable.l The antennas must be aligned, and the RSLs at both ends of the radio link and the cross-

polarization discrimination (XPD) must meet the requirements.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

Page 150: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Background InformationThe principle of the FM test is as follows:l Test the corresponding relations between RSLs and MSEs at multiple sites.l Calculate the RSL corresponding to the demodulation threshold of the MSE, that is, the

receiver sensitivity of the site.l The current RSL minus the receiver sensitivity is the FM.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

Precautions1. The FM test can be supported by the IFU2 board and IFX2 board.2. When the FM is tested, all the services carried on the radio link maybe interrupted.3. For a radio link with 1+1 protection, it is recommended that you lock the protection path

before testing the main radio link and that you switch the signal to the standby path forcedlybefore you test the standby radio link. The main and standby radio paths are testedsynchronously. Therefore, the FMs of the working and protection boards are reported atthe same time.

4. For an XPIC radio link, the paths in polarization direction V and polarization direction Hare tested synchronously. Therefore, the FMs of the working and protection boards arereported at the same time.

Procedure

Step 1 Optional: Lock the protection channel if the radio link between two sites is under 1+1 protection.1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > IF 1

+1 Protection from the Function Tree.2. In Slot Mapping Relation, select the working unit or protection unit. Then, right-click the

selected unit.3. Choose Protection Lockout from the shortcut menu.4. In the displayed dialog box, click OK.5. Click OK again to close the dialog box.

Step 2 Disable the ATPC function on the radio link between two sites.1. Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose

Configuration > IF Interface.2. Click the ATPC Attributes tab.3. Set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled.4. Click Apply.

Step 3 Optional: If any E1 services between the two sites are E1 Priority enabled, delete these E1services.1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > SDH

Service Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Select the services, and right-click Delete.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

Page 151: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

A confirmation dialog box is displayed to prompt you whether to delete the selectedservices.

3. Click OK.

Step 4 Disable the E1 priority function and AM function on the radio link between two sites.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Link

Configuration.2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.3. Select the required IF board, and set Enable E1 Priority to Disable.4. Click Apply.5. Select the corresponding IF board, and set AM Status to Disabled.6. Set Manual Modulation Mode to the highest-efficiency modulation scheme.7. Click Apply.

Step 5 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > FadeMargin.

Step 6 Click the Fade Margin tab.

Step 7 Select the IF board corresponding to the radio link that needs to be tested.

The Result dialog box displays the query result.

Step 8 In Direction, select Remote To Local.

Step 9 Click Start.The Result dialog box displays that the test is successful.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

Page 152: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 10 Repeat Step 8 and Step 9. In Direction, select Local To Remote.The Result dialog box displays that the test is successful.

Step 11 Restore the ATPC function on the radio link between two sites.1. Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose

Configuration > IF Interface.2. Click the ATPC Attributes tab.3. Set ATPC Enable Status to Enabled.4. Click Apply.

Step 12 Restore the AM function and E1 priority on the radio link between two sites.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Link

Configuration.2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

Page 153: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

3. Select the corresponding IF board, and set AM Status to Enabled.

4. Set Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of theFull AM Capacity to initial values.

5. Set Enable E1 priority to Enabled, and Full E1 Capacity to the initial value.

6. Click Apply.

Step 13 Optional: Reconfigure the E1 services that were deleted in Step 3.

1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > SDHService Configuration from the Function Tree.

2. Click New.The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.

3. Reconfigure all deleted E1 services, and click OK.

Step 14 Optional: Cancel the protection lockout for the 1+1 protection on the radio link.

1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > LinkConfiguration from the Function Tree.

2. In Slot Mapping Relation, select the working unit or protection unit. Then, right-click theselected unit.

3. Choose Clear from the shortcut menu.

4. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

----End

5.9 Testing 24-Hour BERYou can check whether the equipment can transmit services stably for a long term by testing24-hour BER.

Prerequisitel The antennas must be aligned.

l The E1 service must be configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl U2000

l BER tester

l E1 jumper

Precautionsl If 24-hour BER cannot be tested for each hop of link because of restrictions of the actual

situation, perform the test for the E1 services at the first node and the last node. Throughthis method, you can ensure that the test path cover all the radio links.

l The following test procedure uses the E1 services between NEs as an example.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

Page 154: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

NOTE

l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions, where the AMfunction works in the highest-efficiency modulation mode.

l The tested E1 services can be Native E1 services or CES E1 services.

l To test CES services in CESoPSN mode, a BER tester supporting Nx64 kbit/s timeslot setting is necessary.

l To test CES services in CESoPSN mode, test the E1 services one by one if the number of timeslots of theservices is different from each other. Do not test the services in a serial manner.

l To test CES E1 services, disable the automatic loopback release function on the PDH interface board.

1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from theMain Menu. The Automatic Disabling of NE Function window is displayed.

2. Select the required NEs in the Object Tree on the left side of the Automatic Disabling of NE

Function window. Then, click . The Automatic Disabling of NE Function window lists theselected NEs.

3. For SDH Optical/Electrical Interface Loopback, set Auto Disabling to Disabled.

4. Click Apply.

Procedure

Step 1 At the central site, extract several typical E1 services on the equipment and then connect themto the DDF in a serial manner. After that, input these services into the BER tester.

RX TXDDF

1234....

RX TX

BER tester

Step 2 On the equipment at the remote site, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.7. Click OK.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.8. Click Close.

Step 3 Perform the 24-hour BER test by using the BER tester.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

Page 155: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 4 Record the test result, which should meet the design requirements.

Step 5 Release the loopback and serial connection.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.7. Click OK.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.8. Click Close.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel If the first 24-hour BER test does not meet the specified requirement, find out the cause

and rectify the fault. Perform another 24-hour BER test until the test is passed.l If the BER exceeds the nominal value in the test for a serial connection, locate the fault by

using the dichotomizing search or other methods until each channel passes the 24-hourBER test independently.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

Page 156: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool

About This Chapter

To improve commissioning efficiency, Huawei has developed the handheld tool dedicated tothe site commissioning of the OptiX RTN equipment.

6.1 Functions and FeaturesThe handheld tool provides various functions and features to meet the requirements of sitecommissioning of microwave equipment.

6.2 Operation InterfaceThe handheld tool provides a user-friendly interface.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

Page 157: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

6.1 Functions and FeaturesThe handheld tool provides various functions and features to meet the requirements of sitecommissioning of microwave equipment.

The handheld tool provides the following functions:l Supports switch-on by pressing and holding the power button.l Supports automatic login to the NE upon switch-on, and supports serial port login mode

from MML to NMS.l Automatically adds logical boards for in-position physical boards.l Automatically changes the LCT access enabling status to Enable.l Displays all in-service physical board information in the standby window.l Supports settings of IF information through the F1 key, settings of NE attributes through

function key F2, and query of configurations through function key F3.l Supports settings and query of IF information, including transmit frequency, transmit

power, T/R spacing, IF channel bandwidth, modulation mode, and 1+1 protection scheme.l Supports settings and query of NE attributes, including NE name, NE ID, extended ID,

extended ECC, IP address, and subnet mask.l Supports settings and query of the DCN of an NE.l Supports regular query of the receive power of an ODU.l Supports query of the basic information, frequency range, power range, and serial number

of an ODU.l Supports query of all current alarms on the NE.l Supports query of the NE version and terminal version.l Supports automatic backup to the flash memory for data protection after the NE databases

are updated.l Supports a real-time check on the physical connections between the handheld tool and the

NE when the user interface is in standby state. Supports automatic re-login in the case ofdisconnection.

6.2 Operation InterfaceThe handheld tool provides a user-friendly interface.

The handheld tool is available in two types: type I and type IV. The two types are the same infunction, but are different in exterior and key arrangement. The following figure shows theexterior and key arrangement of the two types of handheld tool.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

Page 158: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Figure 6-1 Exterior and key arrangement of type I handheld tool

Power key

Charge indicator

Backspace

Digit keys

Up and downkeys

Function keys

Screen

Communicationport

Reset portBack

cover lock

Decimal points

Communicationindicator

Batteryarea

The keys include digit keys, function keys, power key, and confirmation key. The windowmainly displays configuration information about the NE and modification.

Figure 6-2 Exterior and key arrangement of type IV handheld tool

Power keyChargeindicator

Backspace

Digit keys

Up and downkeys

Functionkeys

Screen

Communic-ation port

Reset port

Front Back

F3F2F1

147

C

258

0

369

Type I and type IV are almost the same. The main difference is with regard to the keyarrangement.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

Page 159: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

About This Chapter

This topic uses an example of configuring service data of one hop of TDM radio equipment todescribe how to configure service data.

7.1 Networking DiagramThis topic describes the networking information about the NEs.

7.2 Board ConfigurationsBefore performing the networking planning, you need to be familiar with the boardconfigurations of each NE.

7.3 Service PlanningThe service planning information contains all the parameter information required for configuringthe NE data.

7.4 Configuration ProcessThis topic describes the procedure of data configuration.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

Page 160: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

7.1 Networking DiagramThis topic describes the networking information about the NEs.

As shown in Figure 7-1, there is a TDM radio link between NE A and NE B that are constructedby the OptiX RTN 950, you need to configure 1+1 HSB for the radio link between NE A andNE B.

Figure 7-1 Networking diagram

NE BNE A

Tx high Tx low

10114930M14510M

8E1,7M,16QAM1+1 HSB

H-polarzation

Tx high station Tx Freq.Tx low station Tx Freq.

Radio work modeRF configuarion

Polarization

Link ID

7.2 Board ConfigurationsBefore performing the networking planning, you need to be familiar with the boardconfigurations of each NE.

The board configurations of NE A are the same as the board configurations of NE B, as shownin Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2 Board configuration diagram

SLOT9

(PIU) SLOT 1

SLOT 3

SLOT 2

SLOT 4

SLOT 6

SLOT10

(PIU) SLOT11

(FAN)

CST SLOT 7 CST SLOT 7

SLOT 5IF1

SP3D

IF1

NOTE

The ODU that is connected to the IF board in slot n occupies logical slot 20+n. The logical slot of the ODUis not shown in the board layout diagram.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

Page 161: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

7.3 Service PlanningThe service planning information contains all the parameter information required for configuringthe NE data.

NE attributes

Parameter NE A NE B

Equipment type OptiX RTN 950 OptiX RTN 950

NE ID 101 102

extended ID 9 (default value) 9 (default value)

NE IP address 129.9.0.101 129.9.0.102

Radio Link Information

Table 7-1 Planning information about radio links

Parameter Link 1

Tx high site NE A

Tx low site NE B

Tx frequency at the Tx high site (MHz) 14930

Tx frequency at the Tx low site (MHz) 14510

T/R Spacing (MHz) 420

Microwave working mode 4) 8E1, 7MHz, 16QAM

Link protection mode 1+1 HSB

Polarization directiona H (horizontal polarization)

Transmit power (dBm) 5 (NE A)5 (NE B)

Receive power (dBm) -42 (NE A)-42 (NE B)

ATPC enabling Disabled

NOTEa: This example does not provide the planning information (except for the polarization direction) that is not related to the IDUconfiguration.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

Page 162: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Information About IF BoardsBased on the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of the 1+1 protection,you can obtain the information of IF boards as shown in Table 7-2.

Table 7-2 Information about IF boards

Parameter Link 1

Main IF board 3-IF1

Standby IF board 5-IF1

RF configuration mode 1+1 HSB

Revertive mode Revertive (default value)

Wait to Restore Time 600 seconds (default value)

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled

Timeslot Allocation Information

Figure 7-3 Timeslot allocation diagram

Timeslot

Station NE BNE A

Links-1: NE A-NE B

VC12: 1-8VC4-1

3-IF1

Add/DropFoward

VC12: 1-8

2-SP3D:1-8

3-IF1

2-SP3D:1-8

Figure 7-3shows the service timeslots between NEs.

E1 services between NE A and NE B: Ports 1-8 on the SP3D board in slot 2 add/drop services.

Clock and Orderwire Information

Table 7-3 Clock and orderwire information

Parameter NE A NE B

Clocksource

First clock source Internal clock source 3-IF1-1

Second clocksource

- 5-IF1-1

Third clock source - Internal clock source

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

Page 163: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter NE A NE B

Orderwire

Orderwire phonenumber

101 102

Call waiting time 5 seconds 5 seconds

Orderwire port 3-IF1-15-IF1-1

3-IF1-15-IF1-1

Occupiedoverhead type

E1 E1

7.4 Configuration ProcessThis topic describes the procedure of data configuration.

Precautions

If operations including changing the ID of an NE, modifying the parameters of NEcommunication, and configuring logical boards are already performed, start site commissioningfrom Step 5.

Procedure

Step 1 See Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.

The parameters are set as follows.

Parameter Value

Network Segment 129.9.255.255

NOTE

In this example, the following assumptions are made: the IP address of the gateway NE is never changed andthe specific IP address is unknown. Therefore, the network segment 129.9.255.255 is used as the search domainto search for NEs. If the IP address of the gateway NE is known, it is recommended that you set the IP addressof the gateway NE as the search domain.

In normal cases, NE A and NE B are created in NE List.

Step 2 See Changing the ID of an NE and change NE IDs.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

ID 101 102

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

Page 164: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Extended ID 9 (default value) 9 (default value)

Step 3 See Configuring Logical Boards and configure logical boards.

Configure logical boards based on their mapping relationships with the physical boards.

Step 4 See Synchronizing NE Time and synchronize the NE time.

Step 5 See Creating IF 1+1 Protection and create IF 1+1 protection.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Working Mode HSB HSB

Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Revertive Mode

WTR Time(s) 600 600

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled Disabled

Working Board 3-IF1A-1 3-IF1A-1

Protection Boar 5-IF1-1 5-IF1-1

Step 6 See Configuring IF/ODU Information for a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODUinformation.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value (NE A) Value (NE B)

3-IF1 & 23-ODU 3-IF1 & 23-ODU

Work Mode 4) 8E1,7MHz,16QAM 4) 8E1,7MHz,16QAM

Link ID 101 101

TX Frequency(MHz) 14930 14510

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 5 5

TX Status Unmute Unmute

Receive Power (dBm) -42 -42

ATPC Enable Status Disabled Disabled

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

Page 165: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Step 7 See Creating Cross-Connections for Point-to-Point Services and create the cross-connections.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Level VC-12 VC-12

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source 3-IF1-1 3-IF1-1

Source VC4 VC4-1 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-8 1-8

Sink 2-SP3D 2-SP3D

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-8 1-8

Step 8 See Configuring a Clock Source and configure clock sources.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Clock Source Internal Clock Source 3-IF1-1

- 5-IF1-1

- Internal Clock Source

Step 9 See Configuring the Orderwire Phone and configure the orderwire phone.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Call Waiting Time(s) 9 9

Phone 1 101 102

Orderwire Port 3-IF1-15-IF1-1

3-IF1-15-IF1-1

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

Page 166: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Occupied Overhead Byte E1 E1

----End

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

Page 167: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

A Parameters Description

This chapter describes the parameters used in this document.

A.1 Parameter Description: NE SearchingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.

A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NEThis topic describes the parameters that are used for logging into an NE.

A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID ChangeThis topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

A.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDsThis topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

A.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter SettingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.

A.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

A.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPICThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

A.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1 ProtectionThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.

A.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_CreateThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.

A.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.

A.11 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC AttributeThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.

A.12 Parameter Description: NE Time SynchronizationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.

A.13 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_CreationThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-connections.

A.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

Page 168: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.

A.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_GeneralThis topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.

A.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_AdvancedThis topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

Page 169: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

A.1 Parameter Description: NE SearchingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.

Navigation PathChoose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.

Parameters for the Search FieldParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Address Type IP Address of GNENSAP AddressIP Address Range of GNE

IP Address Range of GNE l If the OSI protocol isused on the DCN, youcan search for an NEbased on NSAPAddress only.

l If the IP protocol isused on the DCN, youcan search for an NEbased on IP Addressof GNE or IP AddressRange of GNE.

l To search for all theNEs that communicatewith the gateway NE,select IP AddressRange of GNE.

l To select the gatewayNE only, select IPAddress of GNE.

NOTEIf Address Type is set to IPAddress of GNE or IPAddress Range of GNE,and if the U2000 (server)and the gateway NE arelocated in different networksegments, ensure that theU2000 and relevant routersare configured with the IProutes for the networksegment in which theU2000 and gateway NE arelocated.

If Address Type is set toNSAP Address, ensure thatthe OSI protocol stack isinstalled.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

Page 170: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Search Address - - l If Address Type is setto IP Address ofGNE, enter the IPaddress of the gatewayNE, such as 129.9.x.x.

l If Address Type is setto IP Address Rangeof GNE, enter thenumber of the IPnetwork segment inwhich the gateway NEis located, such as129.9.255.255.

l If Address Type is setto NSAP Address,enter the NSAPaddress of the gatewayNE.

User Name - - This parameter specifiesthe user name of thegateway NE.

Password - - This parameter specifiesthe password of thegateway NE.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

Page 171: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter for Searching for NEsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Create NE after search SelectedDeselected

Deselected l To create NEs inbatches, it isrecommended that youselect Create NEafter search. The NEsare automaticallycreated after they arefound.

l After Create NE aftersearch is selected,enter NE User andPassword that areused for creating anNE.

NOTEIf only Create NE aftersearch is selected, Searchfor NE is selectedautomatically.

NE User - - l This parameterspecifies the user nameto be entered when anNE is created.

l This parameter is validonly when Create NEafter search isselected.

Password - - l This parameterspecifies the passwordto be entered when anNE is created.

l This parameter is validonly when Create NEafter search isselected.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

Page 172: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Upload after create SelectedDeselected

Deselected l This parameterspecifies whether toautomatically uploadthe NE data after theNE is found andcreated.

l If only Upload aftercreate is selected,Search for NE andCreate NE aftersearch are selectedautomatically.

Parameter for the Found NEsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

NE ID - - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the found NE,which consists ofextended ID and NE ID.

GNE Address - - This parameter indicatesthe address of the gatewayNE that is connected to thefound NE.

GNE ID - - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the gateway NEthat is connected to thefound NE.

Created As GNE YesNo

Yes l This parameterspecifies the passwordto be entered when anNE is created.

l This parameter is validonly when Create NEafter search isselected.

Connection Mode CommonSecurity SSL

Common The communicationbetween the client and theserver is encrypted if thisparameter is set toSecurity SSL.

Port - 1400 This parameter specifiesthe communication port.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

Page 173: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

NE Status CreatedUncreated

- This parameter indicateswhether the found NE iscreated.

Related Tasks5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method

A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NEThis topic describes the parameters that are used for logging into an NE.

Navigation PathIn the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login.

ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

User Name - lct This parameter specifies the name of theuser. This parameter can take the defaultvalue in the case of initial login.

Password - - The default password of user lct ispassword.

Use the same username andpassword to login

SelectedDeselected

Deselected When this parameter is selected, enter UserName and Password to log in to all theselected NEs.

Use the user nameand password thatwas used last time

SelectedDeselected

Deselected When this parameter is selected, enter UserName and Password that were used for thelatest login to log in to the NE.

Related Tasks4.2.3 Logging In to an NE

A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID ChangeThis topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

Page 174: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > NE

Attribute from the Function Tree.2. Click Modify NE ID. The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.

Parameters for Changing NE IDsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

New ID - - l The new ID refers tothe basic ID. If theextended ID is notused, the basic ID of anNE must be unique onthe networks that aremanaged by the sameNMS.

l This parameter is setaccording to thenetwork plan.

NOTEThe NE ID consisting of thebasic ID and extended IDidentifies an NE on theNMS.

New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existingNEs does not exceed therange represented by thebasic ID, do not changethe extended ID.

Related Tasks4.2.4 Changing the NE ID

A.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDsThis topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

Navigation Path1. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed.2. Choose Object Attributes.3. Click Modify NE ID.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

Page 175: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameters for Changing NE IDsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

New ID - - l The new ID refers tothe basic ID. If theextended ID is notused, the basic ID of anNE must be unique onthe networks that aremanaged by the sameNMS.

l This parameter is setaccording to thenetwork plan.

NOTEThe NE ID consisting of thebasic ID and extended IDidentifies an NE on theNMS.

New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existingNEs does not exceed therange represented by thebasic ID, do not changethe extended ID.

Related Tasks5.1.2 Changing the NE ID

A.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication ParameterSetting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Parameters for NE Communication SettingParameter Value Range Default Value Description

IP Address - Before delivery, theIP address of the NEis set to 129.9.0.x.The letter x indicatesthe basic ID.

In the HWECC solution, an IP address is setaccording to the following rules:l The IP address, subnet mask, and default

gateway of the gateway NE should meet

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

Page 176: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Gateway IPAddress

the planning requirements of theexternal DCN.

l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IPaddress must be in the same networksegment.

l The IP address of other NEs should beset according to the NE ID. In this case,the IP address of an NE should be set inthe format of 0x81000000+ID. That is,if the ID is 0x090001, the IP addressshould be set to 129.9.0.1.

- 0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask - 255.255.0.0

Extended ID 1 to 254 9 l Do not change the extended ID when thenumber of actual NEs does not exceedthe range permitted by the basic NE ID.

l It is recommended that this parametertakes the default value.

NSAP Address - - This parameter is valid only when the OSIover DCC solution is applied. Thisparameter is used to set only the area ID ofan NSAP address. The other parts of theNSAP address are automatically generatedby the NE.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

Page 177: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Connection Mode Common + SecuritySSLCommonSecurity SSL

Common + SecuritySSL

l Specifies the connection mode that thegateway NE allows the NMS to use forconnecting to the gateway NE.

l If the gateway NE has no specialsecurity requirement for connection tothe NMS, Connection Mode can be setto Common.

l If the gateway NE requests secureconnection to the NMS for preventinginformation interception and cracking,Connection Mode needs to be set toSecurity SSL.

l If NE communication security levelneeds to be the same as NMScommunication security level,Connection Mode needs to be set toCommon + Security SSL.

l The default parameter value isrecommended unless the gateway NErequires that the NMS use the SSLconnection mode.

l The parameter value takes effect onlywhen it is set for a gateway NE and thegateway NE is connected to the NMS bymeans of the IP protocol.

Related Tasks4.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters5.1.4 Setting NE Communication Parameters

A.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPICWorkgroup_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the XPIC tab.3. Click New.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

Page 178: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

IF ChannelBandwidth

ISX2:7M14M28M40M56MIFX2:7M14M28M56M

- l This parameter specifies the channelspacing when the XPIC function isenabled.

l When this parameter is set to 56M or40M, the high-power ODU must beused.

PolarizationDirection-V

- - l This parameter indicates the polarizationdirection of a radio link.

l It is recommended that you install thetwo XPIC IF boards that form an XPICworkgroup in the slots that are at thesame layer or in the same column, andset the IF port on the XPIC IF board thathas a smaller slot number to Link ID-Vand the IF port on the other XPIC IFboard to Link ID-H.

PolarizationDirection-H

Link ID-V 1 to 4094 1 l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link

and is used to prevent the radio linksbetween sites from being wronglyconnected.

l When the link ID received by an NE isdifferent from the link ID set for the NE,the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm andinserts the AIS.

l These two parameters are set accordingto the planning information. These twoparameters must be set to differentvalues, but Link ID-V must be set to thesame value at both ends of a link andLink ID-H must also be set to the samevalue at both ends of a link.

Link ID-H 2

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

Page 179: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Transmit Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter specifies the transmitpower of an ODU. The value of thisparameter must not exceed the ratedpower range supported by the ODU.

l It is recommended that you set thetransmit power of the ODU to the samevalue at both ends of a radio link.

l Consider the receive power of the ODUat the opposite end when you set thisparameter. Ensure that the receive powerof the ODU at the opposite end canensure stable radio services.

l This parameter is set according to theplanning information.

MaximumTransmit Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter specifies the maximumtransmit power of the ODU. Thisparameter cannot be set to a value thatexceeds the nominal power rang of theODU in the guaranteed capacitymodulation module.

l This parameter is set to limit themaximum transmit power of the ODUwithin this preset range.

l The maximum transmit power adjustedby using the ATPC function should notexceed this value.

l This parameter is set according to theplanning information.

TransmissionFrequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates the channelcentral frequency.

l The value of this parameter must not beless than the sum of the lower transmitfrequency limit supported by the ODUand a half of the channel spacing, andmust not be more than the differencebetween the upper transmit frequencylimit supported by the ODU and a half ofthe channel spacing.

l This parameter is set according to theplanning information.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

Page 180: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacingbetween the transmit frequency and thereceive frequency of an ODU to preventmutual interference between thetransmitter and the receiver.

l If Station Type of the ODU is TXhigh, the transmit frequency is one T/Rspacing higher than the receivefrequency. If Station Type of the ODUis TX low, the transmit frequency is oneT/R spacing lower than the receivefrequency.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, this parameter is set to 0,indicating that the T/R spacingsupported by the ODU is used.

l A valid T/R spacing value is determinedby the ODU itself, and the T/R spacingshould be set according to the technicalspecifications of the ODU.

l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both ends of aradio link.

TransmissionStatus

unmutemute

unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, theODU does not transmit microwavesignals but can normally receivemicrowave signals.

l When this parameter is set to unmute,the ODU normally transmits andreceives microwave signals.

l In normal cases, Transmission Status isset to unmute.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

Page 181: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

ATPC Enabled DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC function is enabled.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled and ifthe RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higheror lower than the central value betweenthe ATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold at the receive end, thereceiver notifies the transmitter todecrease or increase the transmit poweruntil the RSL is within the range that is2 dB higher or lower than the centralvalue between the ATPC upperthreshold and the ATPC lower threshold.

l The settings of the ATPC attributes mustbe consistent at both ends of a radio link.

l In the case of areas where fast fadingseverely affects the radio transmission, itis recommended that you set thisparameter to Disabled.

l During the commissioning process, setthis parameter to Disabled to ensure thatthe transmit power is not changed. Afterthe commissioning, re-set the ATPCattributes.

ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm)

- -45.0 l The central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lowerthreshold is set as the expected receivepower.

l It is recommended that you set ATPCUpper Threshold(dBm) to the sum ofthe planned central value between theATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPCLower Threshold(dBm) to thedifference between the planned centralvalue between the ATPC upperthreshold and the ATPC lower thresholdand 10 dB.

l You can set the ATPC upper thresholdonly when ATPC AutomaticThreshold Enable Status is set toDisabled.

ATPC LowerThreshold(dBm)

- -70.0

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

Page 182: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

ATPC AutomaticThreshold EnableStatus

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC automatic threshold function isenabled.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, theequipment automatically uses the presetATPC upper and lower thresholdsaccording to the work mode of the radiolink.

Related Tasks4.2.10 Creating an XPIC Workgroup

A.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPICThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the XPIC tab.

Parameters on the Main InterfaceParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the workgroup.

PolarizationDirection-V

- - This parameter indicates the IF port to whichthe polarization direction V corresponds.

Link ID-V - - This parameter indicates the link ID towhich the polarization direction Vcorresponds.

PolarizationDirection-H

- - This parameter indicates the IF port to whichthe polarization direction H corresponds.

Link ID-H - - This parameter indicates the link ID towhich the polarization direction Hcorresponds.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

Page 183: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

IF ChannelBandwidth

ISX2:7M14M28M40M56MIFX2:7M14M28M56M

- l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to thechannel spacing of the correspondingradio links.

l When this parameter is set to 56M or40M, the high-power ODU must beused.

l This parameter is set according to theplanning information.

Power to BeReceived -V(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set theexpected receive power of the ODU andis mainly used in the antenna alignmentstage. After this parameter is set, the NEautomatically enables the antennamisalignment indicating function.

l When the antenna misalignmentindicating function is enabled, if theactual receive power of the ODU is 3 dBlower than the power expected to bereceived, the ODU indicator on the IFboard connected to the ODU blinksyellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off),indicating that the antenna is not aligned.

l After the antenna alignment, after thestate that the antenna is aligned lasts for30 minutes, the NE automaticallydisables the antenna misalignmentindicating function.

l When this parameter takes the defaultvalue, the antenna misalignmentindicating function is disabled.

l This parameter is set according to theplanning information.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

Page 184: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Power to BeReceived -H(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set theexpected receive power of the ODU andis mainly used in the antenna alignmentstage. After this parameter is set, the NEautomatically enables the antennamisalignment indicating function.

l When the antenna misalignmentindicating function is enabled, if theactual receive power of the ODU is 3 dBlower than the power expected to bereceived, the ODU indicator on the IFboard connected to the ODU blinksyellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off),indicating that the antenna is not aligned.

l After the antenna alignment, after thestate that the antenna is aligned lasts for30 minutes, the NE automaticallydisables the antenna misalignmentindicating function.

l When this parameter takes the defaultvalue, the antenna misalignmentindicating function is disabled.

l This parameter is set according to theplanning information.

MaximumTransmit Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter specifies the maximumtransmit power of the ODU. Thisparameter cannot be set to a value thatexceeds the nominal power rang of theODU in the guaranteed capacitymodulation module.

l This parameter is set to limit themaximum transmit power of the ODUwithin this preset range.

l The maximum transmit power adjustedby using the ATPC function should notexceed this value.

l This parameter is set according to theplanning information.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

Page 185: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Transmit Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit power of the ODU. Thisparameter cannot be set to a value thatexceeds the nominal power range of theODU.

l It is recommended that you set thetransmit power of the ODU to the samevalue at both ends of a radio link.

l Consider the receive power of the ODUat the opposite end when you set thisparameter. Ensure that the receive powerof the ODU at the opposite end canensure stable radio services.

l This parameter is set according to theplanning information.

TransmissionFrequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit frequency of the ODU, namely,the channel central frequency.

l The value of this parameter must not beless than the sum of the lower TXfrequency limit supported by the ODUand a half of the channel spacing, andmust not be more than the differencebetween the upper TX frequency limitsupported by the ODU and a half of thechannel spacing.

l The difference between the transmitfrequencies of both the ends of a radiolink should be one T/R spacing.

l This parameter needs to be set accordingto the planning information.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

Page 186: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies thespacing between the transmit frequencyand receive frequency of the ODU toprevent mutual interference between thetransmitter and receiver.

l If the ODU is a Tx high station, thetransmit frequency is one T/R spacinghigher than the receive frequency. If theODU is a Tx low station, the transmitfrequency is one T/R spacing lower thanthe receive frequency.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, this parameter is set to 0,indicating that the T/R spacingsupported by the ODU is used.

l A valid T/R spacing value is determinedby the ODU itself, and the T/R spacingshould be set according to the technicalspecifications of the ODU.

l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both ends of aradio link.

TransmissionStatus

unmutemute

unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit status of the ODU.

l If this parameter is set to mute, thetransmitter of the ODU does not workbut can normally receive microwavesignals.

l If this parameter is set to unmute, theODU can normally transmit and receivemicrowave signals.

l In normal cases, this parameter is set tounmute.

Parameters for Hybrid/AM ConfigurationParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the workgroup.

Polarizationdirection

- - This parameter indicates the IF port to whichthe polarization direction H or thepolarization direction V corresponds.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

Page 187: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

AM Enable Status DisabledEnabled

Disabled l When AM Enable Status is set toDisabled, the radio link uses only thespecified modulation scheme. In thiscase, you need to select ManuallySpecified Modulation Mode.

l When AM Enable Status is set toEnabled, the radio link uses thecorresponding modulation schemeaccording to the channel conditions.

Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure thereliable transmission of the E1 services andprovide bandwidth adaptively for theEthernet services when the AM function isenabled.

Modulation Modeof the GuaranteeAM Capacity

QPSK16QAM32QAM64QAM128QAM256QAM

- This parameter specifies the highest-gainmodulation scheme that the AM functionsupports. This parameter is set according tothe planning information. Generally, thevalue of this parameter is determined by thebandwidth of the services that need to betransmitted over the Hybrid radio and theavailability of the radio link thatcorresponds to this modulation scheme.NOTE

Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacitymust be higher than Modulation Mode of theGuarantee AM Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Enabled.

Modulation Modeof the Full AMCapacity

QPSK16QAM32QAM64QAM128QAM256QAM

- This parameter specifies the highest-gainmodulation scheme that the AM functionsupports. This parameter is set according tothe planning information. Generally, thevalue of this parameter is determined by thebandwidth of the services that need to betransmitted over the Hybrid radio and theavailability of the radio link thatcorresponds to this modulation scheme.NOTE

Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacitymust be higher than Modulation Mode of theGuarantee AM Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Enabled.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

Page 188: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Manually SpecifiedModulation Mode

QPSK16QAM32QAM64QAM128QAM256QAM

QPSK This parameter specifies the modulationscheme that the radio link uses for signaltransmission.This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Disabled.

Transmit-EndModulation Mode

- - Displays the modulation mode at thetransmit end.

Receive-EndModulation Mode

- - Displays the modulation mode at the receiveend.

Parameters for ATPC ManagementParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.

ATPC EnableStatus

DisabledEnabled

- l This parameter specifies whether theATPC function is enabled.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled and ifthe RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higheror lower than the central value betweenthe ATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold at the receive end, thereceiver notifies the transmitter todecrease or increase the transmit poweruntil the RSL is within the range that is2 dB higher or lower than the centralvalue between the ATPC upper thresholdand the ATPC lower threshold.

l The settings of the ATPC attributes mustbe consistent at both ends of a radio link.

l In the case of areas where fast fadingseverely affects the radio transmission, itis recommended that you set thisparameter to Disabled.

l During the commissioning process, setthis parameter to Disabled to ensure thatthe transmit power is not changed. Afterthe commissioning, re-set the ATPCattributes.

ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm)

- - l Set the central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lower

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

Page 189: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

ATPC LowerThreshold(dBm)

threshold to a value for the expectedreceive power.

l It is recommended that you set ATPCUpper Threshold(dBm) to the sum ofthe planned central value between theATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPCLower Threshold(dBm) o thedifference between the planned centralvalue between the ATPC upper thresholdand the ATPC lower threshold and 10dB.

l You can set this parameter only whenATPC Automatic Threshold EnableStatus is set to Disabled.

- -

ATPC AutomaticThreshold EnableStatus

DisabledEnabled

- l This parameter specifies whether theATPC automatic threshold function isenabled.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, theequipment automatically uses the presetATPC upper and lower thresholdsaccording to the work mode of the radiolink.

l If this parameter is set to Disabled, youneed to manually set ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm) and ATPC LowerThreshold(dBm).

Related Tasks4.2.11 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup

A.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link

Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.2. Click New.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

Page 190: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Working Mode HSBFDSD

HSB l This parameter specifies the workingmode of the IF 1+1 protection.

l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a1+1 hot standby configuration for the IFboard and ODU at both ends of each hopof a radio link to realize the protection.

l In FD mode, the system uses twochannels that have a frequency spacingbetween them, to transmit and receivethe same signal. The remote end selectssignals from the two received signals.With FD protection, the impact of thefading on signal transmission is reduced.

l In SD mode, the system uses twoantennas that have a space distancebetween them, to receive the samesignal. The equipment selects signalsfrom the two received signals. With SDprotection, the impact of the fading onsignal transmission is reduced.

l The FD mode and SD mode arecompatible with the HSB switchingfunction.

l This parameter is set according to thenetwork plan.

Revertive Mode Revertive ModeNon-RevertiveMode

Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertivemode of the IF 1+1 protection.

l When this parameter is set to RevertiveMode, the NE that is in the switchingstate releases the switching and enablesthe former working channel to return tothe normal state some time after theformer working channel is restored tonormal.

l When this parameter is set to Non-Revertive Mode, the NE that is in theswitching state keeps the current stateunchanged unless another switchingoccurs even though the former workingchannel is restored to normal.

l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Revertive Mode.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

Page 191: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-restore (WTR) time.

l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches theset WTR time, a revertive switchingoccurs.

l You can set WTR Time(s) only whenRevertive Mode is set to RevertiveMode.

l It is recommended that you use thedefault value.

Enable ReverseSwitching

EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter indicates whether thereverse switching function is enabled.

l When both the main IF board and thestandby IF board at the sink end reportservice alarms, they send the alarms tothe source end by using the MWRDIoverhead in the microwave frame. Whenthis parameter at the source end is set toEnabled and the reverse switchingconditions are met, the IF 1+1 protectionswitching occurs at the source end.

l This parameter is valid only whenWorking Mode is set to HSB or SD.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou set this parameter to Enabled.

Working Board - - This parameter specifies the working boardof the protection group.

Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the protectionboard of the protection group.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

Page 192: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Alarm ReportMode

Only board alarmsOnly Protectiongroup alarmsProtection groupand board alarms

- l When Alarm Report Mode is set toOnly board alarms, only IF boardalarms are reported.

l When Alarm Report Mode is set toOnly protection group alarms, alarmsare reported if a protection group fails ordegrades and suppress IF board alarmsand radio link alarms.

l When Alarm Report Mode is set toProtection group and board alarms,IF board alarms and protection groupalarms are reported.

l It is recommended that you set AlarmReport Mode to Only protectiongroup alarms. In this case, protectiongroup alarms are reported to indicateradio link faults.

NOTEThe faulty board reports related fault alarmsregardless of parameter settings.

Anti-jitter Time 0 to 600 - l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0,a protection group does not report analarm immediately after it is degraded,but reports the alarm after the specifiedanti-jitter time expires.

l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time(s) take its default value.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable ReverseSwitching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

Related Tasks4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group

A.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_CreateThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1

Protection from the Function Tree.

2. Click Create.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

Page 193: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Working Mode HSBFDSD

HSB l This parameter specifies the workingmode of the IF 1+1 protection.

l When Working Mode is set to HSB, theequipment provides a 1+1 hot standbyconfiguration for the IF board and ODUat both ends of each hop of a radio linkto realize the protection.

l When Working Mode is set to FD, thesystem uses two channels that have afrequency spacing between them, totransmit and receive the same signal. Theremote end selects signals from the tworeceived signals. With FD protection, theimpact of the fading on signaltransmission is reduced.

l When Working Mode is set to SD, thesystem uses two antennas that have aspace distance between them, to receivethe same signal. The equipment selectssignals from the two received signals.With SD protection, the impact of thefading on signal transmission is reduced.

l The FD mode and SD mode arecompatible with the HSB switchingfunction.

l This parameter is set according to thenetwork plan.

Revertive Mode Revertive ModeNon-Revertive

Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertivemode of the IF 1+1 protection.

l When Revertive Mode is set toRevertive Mode, the NE that is in theswitching state releases the switchingand enables the former working channelto return to the normal state some timeafter the former working channel isrestored to normal. It is recommendedthat you set this parameter to RevertiveMode.

l When Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in theswitching state keeps the current stateunchanged unless another switchingoccurs even though the former workingchannel is restored to normal.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

Page 194: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-restore (WTR) time.

l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches theset WTR Time(s), a revertive switchingoccurs.

l You can set WTR Time(s) only whenRevertive Mode is set to RevertiveMode. It is recommended that you usethe default value.

Enable ReverseSwitching

EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter indicates whether thereverse switching function is enabled.

l When both the main IF board and thestandby IF board at the sink end reportservice alarms, they send the alarms tothe source end by using the MWRDIoverhead in the microwave frame. WhenEnable Reverse Switching at the sourceend is set to Enabled and the reverseswitching conditions are met, the IF 1+1protection switching occurs at the sourceend.

l Enable Reverse Switching is valid onlywhen Working Mode is set to HSB orSD.

l Generally, if Working Mode is set toHSB, it is recommended that you setEnable Reverse Switching toDisabled; if Working Mode is set toSD, it is recommended that you setEnable Reverse Switching toEnabled.

Working Board - - This parameter specifies the working boardof the protection group.

Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the protectionboard of the protection group.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

Page 195: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Alarm ReportMode

Only board alarmsOnly protectiongroup alarmsProtection groupand board alarms

Only board alarms l When Alarm Report Mode is set toOnly board alarms, only IF boardalarms are reported.

l When Alarm Report Mode is set toOnly protection group alarms, alarmsare reported if a protection group fails ordegrades and suppress IF board alarmsand radio link alarms.

l When Alarm Report Mode is set toProtection group and board alarms,IF board alarms and protection groupalarms are reported.

l It is recommended that you set AlarmReport Mode to Only protectiongroup alarms. In this case, protectiongroup alarms are reported to indicateradio link faults.

NOTEThe faulty board reports related fault alarmsregardless of parameter settings.

Anti-jitter Time(s) 0 to 600 300 l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0,a protection group does not report analarm immediately after it is degraded,but reports the alarm after the specifiedanti-jitter time expires.

l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time(s) take its default value.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s) and EnableReverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

Related Tasks5.1.6 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group

A.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODUConfiguration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link

Configuration from the Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

Page 196: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Parameters for Configuring the IFParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK2,4E1,3.5MHz,16QAM3,8E1,14MHz,QPSK4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM5,16E1,28MHz,QPSK6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM10,22E1,14MHz,32QAM11,26E1,14MHz,64QAM12,32E1,14MHz,128QAM13,35E1,28MHz,16QAM14,44E1,28MHz,32QAM15,53E1,28MHz,64QAM

- l This parameter indicates or specifies thework mode of the radio link in "workmode number, service capacity, channelspacing, modulation mode" format.

l This parameter is set according to thenetwork plan. The work modes of the IFboards at the two ends of a radio linkmust be the same.

NOTEThe IF1 board supports this parameter.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

Page 197: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID ofa radio link. As the identifier of a radiolink, this parameter is used to preventincorrect connections of radio linksbetween sites.

l If the value of Received Radio LinkID does not match the preset value ofLink ID at the local end, the local endinserts the AIS signal to the downstreamdirection of the service. At the same time,the local end reports MW_LIM alarm tothe NMS, indicating that the link IDs donot match.

l Link ID is set according to the networkplan. Each radio link of an NE shouldhave a unique link ID, and the link IDs atboth ends of a radio link should be thesame.

Received Link ID - - l This parameter indicates the received IDof the radio link.

l If the value of Received Radio LinkID does not match the preset value ofRadio Link ID at the local end, the localend inserts the AIS signal to thedownstream direction of the service. Atthe same time, the local end reports analarm to the NMS, indicating that the linkIDs do not match.

l When the radio link becomes faulty, thisparameter is displayed as an invalidvalue.

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)Hybrid(NativeSTM-1+ETH)SDH

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

l Displays or specifies the type of servicescarried by the IF board.

l If the Integrated IP radio transmitsNative E1 services, set this parameter toHybrid(Native E1+ETH).

l If the Integrated IP radio transmitsNative STM-1 services, set thisparameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH).

l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,set this parameter to SDH.

NOTEThe ISU2 and ISX2 boards support thisparameter.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

Page 198: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

IF ChannelBandwidth

3.5M7M14M28M40M56M

- IF Channel Bandwidth indicates thechannel spacing of the corresponding radiolink. This parameter is set according to thenetwork plan.NOTEl This parameter is not applicable to the IF1

board.

l The IFU2 board does not support the value40M.

l The IFX2 board does not support the values40M.

l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3.5Monly for the ISU2 board.

AM Mode - - This parameter is not applicable to the OptiXRTN 950.

AM Enable Status DisabledEnabled

Disabled l When AM Enable Status is set toDisabled, the radio link uses only thespecified modulation scheme. In thiscase, you need to select ManuallySpecified Modulation Mode.

l When AM Enable Status is set toEnabled, the radio link uses thecorresponding modulation schemeaccording to the channel conditions.

l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensurethe reliable transmission of the E1services and provide bandwidthadaptively for the Ethernet serviceswhen the AM function is enabled.

l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AMfunction when IF Service Type isSDH.

l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3.5Mfor the ISU2 board, the AM function isunavailable and AM Enable Statusmust be set to Disabled.

NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Manually SpecifiedModulation Mode

QPSK16QAM32QAM64QAM128QAM256QAM

QPSK l This parameter specifies the modulationscheme that the radio link uses for signaltransmission.

l This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Disabled.

NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

Page 199: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Modulation Modeof the GuaranteeAM Capacity

QPSK16QAM32QAM64QAM128QAM256QAM

QPSK l This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Enabled.

l Modulation Mode of the GuaranteeAM Capacity specifies the lowest-ordermodulation scheme that the AM functionsupports. This parameter is set accordingto the network plan. Generally, the valueof this parameter is determined by theservice transmission bandwidth that theHybrid radio must ensure and theavailability of the radio link thatcorresponds to this modulation scheme.

NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Modulation Modeof the Full AMCapacity

QPSK16QAM32QAM64QAM128QAM256QAM

QPSK l This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Enabled.

l Modulation Mode of the Full AMCapacity specifies the highest-ordermodulation scheme that the AM functionsupports. This parameter is set accordingto the network plan. Generally, the valueof this parameter is determined by thebandwidth of the services that need to betransmitted over the Hybrid radio and theavailability of the radio link thatcorresponds to this modulation scheme.NOTE

Modulation Mode of the Full AMCapacity must be higher than ModulationMode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

STM-1 Capacity - - l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IFboard.

l This parameter is available only when IFService Type is set to Hybrid(NativeSTM-1+ETH) and SDH.

l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(NativeSTM-1+ETH), this parameter can be setto 0 or 1.

l If IF Service Type is SDH, thisparameter can be set to 1 or 2.

NOTEThe IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not supportthis parameter.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

Page 200: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Guarantee E1Capacity

- - l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled,this parameter needs to be set accordingto IF Channel Bandwidth, ModulationMode of the Guarantee AM Capacity,and the actually transmitted services.

l If AM Enable Status is set toDisabled, this parameter needs to be setaccording to IF Channel Bandwidth,Manually Specified ModulationMode, and the actually transmittedservices.

l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, thisparameter is available when IF ServiceType is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Guarantee E1Capacity Range

- - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IFboard in guarantee capacity modulationmode.

Data ServiceBandwidth(Mbit/s)

- - Displays the data service bandwidth of theIF board.

Enable E1 Priority DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether toenable the E1 priority function.

l This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Enabled.

l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, thisparameter is available when IF ServiceType is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

Page 201: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Full E1 Capacity - - l This parameter specifies the number oftransmitted E1 services in ModulationMode of the Full AM Capacity.

l This parameter is valid if Enable E1Priority is set to Enabled.

l E1 service bandwidth in full capacitymode ≤ Service bandwidth in fullcapacity mode - Service bandwidth inguarantee capacity mode + E1 servicebandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.In addition, the number of E1 services infull capacity modulation mode should besmaller than or equal to the maximumnumber of E1 services in full capacitymodulation mode.

l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to thesame value at both ends of a radio link.

l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, thisparameter is available when IF ServiceType is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Full E1 CapacityRange

- - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IFboard in full capacity modulation mode.

Parameters for Configuring the RFParameter Value Range Default Value Description

TX Frequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit frequency of the ODU, namely,the channel central frequency.

l The value of this parameter must not beless than the sum of the lower TXfrequency limit supported by the ODUand a half of the channel spacing, andmust not be more than the differencebetween the upper TX frequency limitsupported by the ODU and a half of thechannel spacing.

l The difference between the transmitfrequencies of both the ends of a radiolink should be one T/R spacing.

l This parameter needs to be set accordingto the network plan.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

Page 202: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Range of TXFrequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates the range of thetransmit frequency of the ODU.

l The Range of Frequency(MHz)depends on the specifications of theODU.

Actual TXFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual transmitfrequency of the ODU.

Actual RXFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual receivefrequency of the ODU.

T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacingbetween the transmit frequency and thereceive frequency of an ODU to preventinterference between them.

l If Station Type of the ODU is TXhigh, the TX frequency is one T/Rspacing higher than the receivefrequency. If Station Type of the ODUis TX low, the TX frequency is one T/Rspacing lower than the receivefrequency.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, set this parameter to 0,indicating that the T/R spacing supportedby the ODU is used.

l A valid T/R spacing value is determinedby the ODU itself, and the T/R spacingshould be set according to the technicalspecifications of the ODU.

l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both the ends ofa radio link.

Actual T/RSpacing(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual T/Rspacing of the ODU.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

Page 203: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameters for Configuring the PowerParameter Value Range Default Value Description

TX Power(dBm) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit power of the ODU. Thisparameter cannot be set to a value thatexceeds the nominal power range of theODU.

l This parameter cannot take a valuegreater than the preset value ofMaximum Transmit Power(dBm).

l It is recommended that you set thetransmit power of the ODU to the samevalue at both ends of a radio link.

l Consider the receive power of the ODUat the opposite end when you set thisparameter. Ensure that the receive powerof the ODU at the opposite end canensure stable radio services.

l This parameter needs to be set accordingto the network plan.

Range of TXPower(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the range of thetransmit power of the ODU.

Actual TX Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates the actualtransmit power of the ODU.

l If the ATPC function is enabled, thequeried actual transmit power may bedifferent from the preset value.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

Page 204: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Power to BeReceived(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used toset the expected receive power of theODU and is mainly used in the antennaalignment stage. After this parameter isset, the NE automatically enables theantenna misalignment indicatingfunction.

l When the antenna misalignmentindicating function is enabled, When theantenna non-alignment indicationfunction is enabled, if the actual receivepower of the ODU is 3 dB lower than thepower expected to be received, the ODUindicator on the IF board connected tothe ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300ms off), indicating that the antenna is notaligned.

l After the antenna alignment, after thestate that the antenna is aligned lasts for30 minutes, the NE automaticallydisables the antenna misalignmentindicating function.

l When Power to Be Received(dBm)takes the default value (-10.0), theantenna misalignment indicatingfunction is disabled.

l This parameter is set according to thenetwork plan.

Actual RX Power(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the actual receivepower of the ODU.

TX Status UnmuteMute

Unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit status of the ODU.

l When this parameter is set to Mute, thetransmitter of the ODU does not workbut can normally receive microwavesignals.

l When this parameter is set to Unmute,the ODU can normally transmit andreceive microwave signals.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou set TX Status to unmute.

Actual TX Status - - This parameter indicates the actual transmitstatus of the ODU.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

Page 205: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Equipment InformationParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency bandwhere the ODU operates.

Equip Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipmenttype of the ODU.

l PDH and SDH indicate the transmissioncapacity only and are irrelevant to thetype of transmitted service.

Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether theODU is a Tx high station or a Tx lowstation.

l The transmit frequency of a Tx highstation is one T/R spacing higher than thetransmit frequency of a Tx low station.

Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturingserial number and the manufacturer code ofthe ODU.

TransmissionPower Level

- - This parameter indicates the level of theoutput power of the ODU.

Related Tasks4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link5.1.7 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link

A.11 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC AttributeThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.

Navigation Pathl Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose

Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.l Click the ATPC Attributes tab.

ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port - - This parameter indicates the correspondingIF interface.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

Page 206: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

ATPC EnableStatus

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC function is enabled.

l When this parameter is set to Enabledand if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dBhigher or lower than the central valuebetween the ATPC upper threshold andthe ATPC lower threshold at the receiveend, the receiver notifies the transmitterto decrease or increase the transmitpower until the RSL is within the rangethat is 2 dB higher or lower than thecentral value between the ATPC upperthreshold and the ATPC lower threshold.

l The settings of the ATPC attributes mustbe consistent at both ends of a radio link.

l In the case of areas where fast fadingseverely affects the radio transmission, itis recommended that you set ATPCEnable Status to Disabled.

l During the commissioning process, setthis parameter to Disabled to ensure thatthe transmit power is not changed. Afterthe commissioning, re-set the ATPCattributes.

ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm)

- -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lowerthreshold to a value for the expectedreceive power.

l It is recommended that you set ATPCUpper Threshold(dBm) to the sum ofthe planned central value between theATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPCLower Threshold(dBm) to thedifference between the planned centralvalue between the ATPC upper thresholdand the ATPC lower threshold and 10dB.

l You can set the ATPC upper thresholdonly when ATPC AutomaticThreshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.

ATPC LowerThreshold(dBm)

- -70.0

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

Page 207: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

ATPC AutomaticThreshold EnableStatus

EnabledDisabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC automatic threshold function isenabled.

l If ATPC Automatic Threshold EnableStatus is set to Enabled, the equipmentautomatically uses the preset ATPCupper and lower thresholds according tothe work mode of the radio link.

l If ATPC Automatic Threshold EnableStatus is set to Disabled, you need tomanually set ATPC Upper AutomaticThreshold(dBm) and ATPC LowerAutomatic Threshold(dBm).

ATPC UpperAutomaticThreshold(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates that theequipment automatically uses the presetATPC upper and lower thresholds.

l This parameter is valid only when ATPCAutomatic Threshold Enable Status isset to Enabled.

ATPC LowerAutomaticThreshold(dBm)

- -

A.12 Parameter Description: NE Time SynchronizationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.

Navigation Path1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from

the Main Menu.2. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.

Parameters for NE Time SynchronizationParameter Value Range Default Value Description

NE Name - - This parameter indicatesthe name of the NE.

NE ID - - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the NE.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

Page 208: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Synchronous Mode Standard NTPNMNull

Null l If this parameter is setto NM, the NEsynchronizes the timeof the NMS server.

l If this parameter is setto Standard NTP, theNE synchronizes theNetwork TimeProtocol (NTP) serverthrough the standardNTP.

Standard NTPAuthentication

EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter is validonly when SynchronousMode is set to StandardNTP.

Parameters for the Standard NTP ServerParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Standard NTP ServerIdentifier

NE IDIP

NE ID l If the NE functions asthe gateway NE, thisparameter is set to IP.

l If the NE functions asa non-gateway NE andcommunicates withthe gateway NEthrough the HWECCprotocol, thisparameter is set to NEID.

l If the NE functions asa non-gateway NE andcommunicates withthe gateway NEthrough the IPprotocol, thisparameter is set to IP.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

Page 209: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Standard NTP Server - - l If the NE functions asthe gateway NE, thisparameter is set to theIP address of theexternal NTP server.

l If the NE functions asa non-gateway NE,this parameter is set tothe ID or IP address ofthe gateway NE.

Standard NTP ServerKey

0 to 1024 0 l If the NTP server doesnot need toauthenticated, thisparameter is set to thevalue "0".

l If the NTP serverneeds to beauthenticated, theauthentication isperformed accordingto the allocated key ofthe NTP server. In thiscase, the NEauthenticates the NTPserver based on the keyand the correspondingpassword (specified inthe management of thestandard NTP key).

Parameters for Setting Automatic SynchronizationParameter Value Range Default Value Description

SynchronizationStarting Time

- - l This parameterspecifies the start timeof the synchronizationperiod. After thisparameter is specified,the NMS and the NEsynchronize the timeonce at the intervals ofSynchronizationPeriod(days).

l It is recommended thatyou use the defaultvalue.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

Page 210: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

DST SelectedDeselected

Deselected l This parameterindicates whetherSynchronizationStarting Time is thedaylight saving time.

l This parameter is setaccording to the actualsituation.

Synchronization Period(days)

1 to 300 1 l This parameterindicates the period ofsynchronizing the timeof the NE with the timeof the NMS.

l It is recommended thatyou use the defaultvalue.

Related Tasks5.1.9 Synchronizing the NE Time5.1.9 Synchronizing the NE Time

A.13 Parameter Description: SDH ServiceConfiguration_Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-connections.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH

Service Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-

connection.3. Click Create.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

Page 211: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Level VC12VC3VC4

VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of theservice to be created.

l If the service is an E1 service or a dataservice that is bound with VC-12channels, set this parameter to VC12.

l If the service is a data service that isbound with VC-3 channels, set thisparameter to VC3.

l If all the services on a VC-4 channel passthrough the NE, set this parameter toVC4.

Direction BidirectionalUnidirectional

Bidirectional l When this parameter is set toUnidirectional, create only the cross-connections from the service source tothe service sink.

l When this parameter is set toBidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source tothe service sink and the cross-connections from the service sink to theservice source.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou set this parameter to Bidirectional.

Source Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of theservice source.

Source VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number ofthe VC-4 channel where the servicesource is located.

l This parameter cannot be set whenSource Slot is set to the slot of thetributary board.

Source TimeslotRange(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l This parameter indicates the timeslotrange of the service source.

l This parameter can be set to a number orseveral numbers. When setting thisparameter to several numbers, use thecomma (,) to separate the discretenumbers, or use the endash (-) torepresent a consecutive number. Forexample, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

l This parameter is set according to thenetwork plan.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

Page 212: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Sink Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of theservice sink.

Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number ofthe VC-4 channel where the service sinkis located.

l This parameter cannot be set when SinkSlot is set to the slot of the tributaryboard.

Sink TimeslotRange(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l This parameter specifies the timeslotrange of the service sink.

l This parameter can be set to a number orseveral numbers. When setting thisparameter to several numbers, use thecomma (,) to separate the discretenumbers, or use the endash (-) torepresent a consecutive number. Forexample, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

l This parameter is set according to thenetwork plan.

E1 Priority HighLowNone

- l This parameter specifies the priority ofan E1 service. This parameter isavailable only if the E1 priority functionis enabled for the ports configured in thecross-connections.

l If E1 Priority is set to High,transmission of the E1 service is ensuredin any modulation scheme.

l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmissionof the E1 service is ensured only in full-capacity modulation scheme

l If the service priority is not specifiedduring service creation, E1 Priority isNone. In this case, the E1 priority of aservice needs to be changed after theservice is created.

ActivateImmediately

YesNo

Yes l This parameter specifies whether toimmediately activate the configuredservice.

l To immediately deliver the configuredSDH service to the NE, set this parameterto Yes.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

Page 213: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Related Tasks5.1.10 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services

A.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority TableThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >

Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.2. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.

ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Clock Source - - l External clock source1 indicates the externalclock source at theCLK or TIME1 port onthe CST or CSH boardin physical slot 7.External clock source2 indicates the externalclock source at theCLK or TIME1 port onthe CST or CSH boardin physical slot 8.

l The internal clocksource is always at thelowest priority andindicates that the NEworks in the free-runmode.

l The clock sources andthe correspondingclock source prioritylevels are determinedaccording to the clocksynchronizationschemes.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

Page 214: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

External Clock SourceMode

2 Mbit/s2 MHz

2Mbit/s l This parameterindicates the type ofthe external clocksource signal.

l This parameter is setaccording to theexternal clock signal.In normal cases, theexternal clock signal isa 2 Mbit/s signal.

Synchronous Status Byte SA4 to SA8 SA4 l This parameter is validonly when ExternalClock Source Mode isset to 2Mbit/s.

l This parameterindicates which bit ofthe TS0 in odd framesof the external clocksignal is used totransmit the SSM.

l This parameter needsto be set only when theSSM or extended SSMis enabled. In normalcases, the externalclock sources use theSA4 to transmit theSSM.

Clock Source PrioritySequence (Highest: 1)

- - Displays the prioritysequence of clock sources.1 indicates the highestclock source priority.

Related Tasks5.1.11 Configuring the Clock Sources

A.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_GeneralThis topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >

Orderwire from the Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

Page 215: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

2. Click the General tab.

ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Call Waiting Time(s)

1 to 9 9 l This parameter indicates the waitingtime after the local station dials thenumber. If the calling station does notreceive the response message from thecalled station within the call waitingtime, it automatically removes thecommunication connection.

l If less than 30 nodes exist in theorderwire subnet, it is recommended thatyou set this parameter to five seconds. Ifmore than 30 nodes exist in the orderwiresubnet, it is recommended that you setthis parameter to nine seconds.

l The call waiting time should be set to thesame for all the NEs.

Dialling Mode PulseDual-ToneFrequency

Dual-ToneFrequency

This parameter indicates the dialling modeof the orderwire phone.

Conference Call - 888 l This parameter indicates the telephonenumber of the network-wide orderwireconference call.

l When an OptiX RTN 950 dials thetelephone number 888, the orderwirephones of all the NEs on the orderwiresubnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 950receives the call, the orderwire phoneson the other NEs do not ring. In this case,the orderwire point-to-multipoint groupcall changes to a point-to-point callbetween two NEs.

l The telephone number of the orderwireconference call should be the same forall the nodes on the same subnet.

l The telephone number of the orderwireconference call must have the samelength as the telephone number of theorderwire phone (phone 1) at the localsite.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

Page 216: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Phone 1 100 to 99999999 101 l This parameter specifies the orderwirephone number of the local station. Anaddressing call refers to a point-to-pointcall.

l The length of the orderwire phonenumber of each NE should be the same.It is recommended that you set the phonenumber to a three-digit number.

l The orderwire phone number of each NEshould be unique. It is recommended thatthe phone numbers are allocated from101 for the NEs in a sequential orderaccording to the NE IDs.

l The orderwire phone number cannot beset to the group call number 888 andcannot start with 888.

AvailableOrderwire Port

- - This parameter indicates the available portfor the orderwire phone.

SelectedOrderwire Port

- - This parameter indicates the selected portfor the orderwire phone.

Related Tasks4.2.13 Configuring the Orderwire5.1.12 Configuring Orderwire

A.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_AdvancedThis topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >

Orderwire from the Function Tree.2. Click the Advanced tab.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

Page 217: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire PhonesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

OrderwireOccupied Bytes

E1E2

E1 l This parameter specifies the overheadbyte that is used to transmit the orderwiresignals.

l Regardless the parameter value, theradio link always uses a customizedoverhead byte to transmit the orderwiresignals. Hence, this parameter should beset according to the occupied SDHoverhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.

Related Tasks4.2.13 Configuring the Orderwire5.1.12 Configuring Orderwire

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

Page 218: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

B Glossary

Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.

B.1 0-9This section provides the terms starting with numbers.

B.2 A-EThis section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.

B.3 F-JThis section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.

B.4 K-OThis section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.

B.5 P-TThis section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.

B.6 U-ZThis section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

Page 219: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

B.1 0-9This section provides the terms starting with numbers.

1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)

B.2 A-EThis section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.

A

ABR See available bit rate

ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization

access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have accessto a resource.

ACL See access control list

adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation scheme according tothe channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation scheme to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrumutilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adoptsthe low-efficiency modulation scheme to improve the anti-interference capability of thelink that carries high-priority services.

ADC See analog to digital converter

add/drop multiplexer Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signalscontained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.

Address ResolutionProtocol

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses toMAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses throughARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the hostconverts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipmentthrough its IP address.

adjacent channelalternate polarization

A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontalpolarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.

ADM See add/drop multiplexer

administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layerand the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher orderVC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative tothe multiplex section frame start.

AF See assured forwarding

aggregation A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete orconceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

Page 220: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

AIS See alarm indication signal

alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the NetworkManagement System (NMS). Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view thedetails of the alarm.

alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.

Alarm Filtering An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based onthe filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarminformation. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed orstored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.

alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failurehas been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.

alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be thenetworkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific functionmodule of a specific board.

AM See adaptive modulation

analog to digitalconverter

An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. Thereverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).

APS See automatic protection switching

ARP See Address Resolution Protocol

assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic thatexceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward thetraffic instead of discarding the packets.

AsynchronousTransfer Mode

A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous inthe sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.

ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATM PVC ATM permanent virtual circuit

ATPC See automatic transmit power control

attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used toensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.

AU See administrative unit

automatic protectionswitching

Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switchto a standby facility to recover the traffic.

automatic transmitpower control

A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detectedat the receiver

available bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possibleforwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-timequality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

Page 221: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

B

backward defectindication

When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI)to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.

bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in anetwork. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies thetransmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.

base station controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworkswith the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It providesthe following functions: radio resource management, base station management, powercontrol, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages oneor more BTSs in an actual network.

base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of trafficand signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radioequipment, and the antenna.

basic input/outputsystem

A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output controlprograms, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system settinginformation. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.

BDI See backward defect indication

BE See best effort

BER See bit error rate

best effort A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwardedfollowing the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of thenetwork and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the timeit reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet lossratio, and high reliability.

binding strap The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparentpolypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).

BIOS See basic input/output system

BIP See bit interleaved parity

bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the correspondingbit in the received digital signal.

bit error rate Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure thecommunications quality of a network.

bit interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by thetransmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that thefirst bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in thecovered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit ofall X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by settingthe BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of thesignal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position withinthe X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includesthe BIP-X.

BPDU See bridge protocol data unit

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

Page 222: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

bridge protocol dataunit

The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN thatuses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information onports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it wasintended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in anetwork topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridgesinterfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range isdetermined by the broadcast address.

BSC See base station controller

BTS See base transceiver station

buffer A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in inter-networking tocompensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of datacan be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In aprogram, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that willbe read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to storean advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.

C

cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.

cable tray N/A

cable trough N/A

CAR See committed access rate

CBR See constant bit rate

CBS See committed burst size

CC See connectivity check

CCC See circuit cross connect

CCDP See co-channel dual polarization

CCM See continuity check message

CE See customer edge

central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interpretsand executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and executeinstructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer'smain data-transfer path, the bus.

CES See circuit emulation service

CF See compact flash

CGMP See Cisco Group Management Protocol

channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between twoor more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmittedper second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits persecond. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

Page 223: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

CIR See committed information rate

circuit cross connect An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels.

circuit emulationservice

A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At thetransmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATMcells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, theinterface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CEStechnology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the originalsequence at the reception end.

Cisco GroupManagement Protocol

N/A

CIST See common and internal spanning tree

CIST root A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network.

clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in anetwork.

co-channel dualpolarization

A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a verticalpolarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twicethe transmission capacity of the single polarization.

coarse wavelengthdivision multiplexing

A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels intothe same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDMdoes not support optical amplifiers and is applied in a short-distance chain network.

colored packet A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.

committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classifiedinto QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission ratecan be defined.

committed burst size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committedinformation rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that thisparameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might beforwarded.

committed informationrate

The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normalconditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred tothe leaky bucket.

common and internalspanning tree

The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logicalcontinuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTPto ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.

compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used inportable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory ina standardized enclosure.

concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can beused a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.

connectivity check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved byeach MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

Page 224: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

constant bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based onthe constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on preciseclocking to ensure undistorted transmission.

continuity checkmessage

CCM is used to detect the link status.

corrugated pipe Used to protect optical fibers.

CPU See central processing unit

CRC See cyclic redundancy check

cross polarizationinterferencecancellation

A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminatethe cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.

customer edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to theService Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.

CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing

cyclic redundancycheck

A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking usesa complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sendingdevice performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that itsends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation aftertransmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmissionwas error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmissionincludes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

D

data communicationnetwork

A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the DataCommunication Function (DCF).

data communicationschannel

The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal totransmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.

Datagram A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram,UDP datagram.

DC See direct current

DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)

DC-C DC-return common (with ground)

DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)

DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground)

DC-return common(with ground)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line betweenthe output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DC-return common(with ground)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line betweenthe output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

Page 225: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

DC-return isolate (withground)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGNDon the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DCC See data communications channel

DCN See data communication network

DDF See digital distribution frame

DDN See digital data network

DE See discard eligible

differentiated services A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a seriesof functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of per-hop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioningfunctions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.

differentiated servicescode point

A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to applydifferentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServpolicy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet andother IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.

DiffServ See differentiated services

digital data network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiberchannel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplextechnology.

digital distributionframe

A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange withtransmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.

digital modulation A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of thecarrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, theinformation can be transmitted by the carrier.

direct current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop orchange amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.

discard eligible A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supportsthe FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet trafficexceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In thecase of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.

Distance VectorMulticast RoutingProtocol

An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typicaldense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routingdatagrams with its neighbors.

DS boundary node A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in adomain that is not DS-capable.

DS domain In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group ofnetwork nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It providespoint-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.

DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.

DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.

DSCP See differentiated services code point

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

Page 226: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio wavesorthogonally polarized.

DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E

E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation

E-LAN See Ethernet LAN

E-Line See Ethernet line

E-Tree See Ethernet-tree

EBS See excess burst size

ECC See embedded control channel

EF See expedited forwarding

electromagneticcompatibility

Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunicationsequipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagneticenvironment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentionalelectromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.

electromagneticinterference

Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades orlimits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.

electrostatic discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at differentelectrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.

embedded controlchannel

A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)information between NEs.

EMC See electromagnetic compatibility

EMI See electromagnetic interference

Engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.

EPL See Ethernet private line

EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service

equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate forthe changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.

ERPS See Ethernet ring protection switching

ESD See electrostatic discharge

ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf orcabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.

Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/CollisionDetection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.

Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/CollisionDetection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

Page 227: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Ethernet aggregation A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtualconnection).

Ethernet LAN A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernetvirtual connection).

Ethernet line A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtualconnection).

Ethernet private LANservice

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over adedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, orMPLS server layer networks.

Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-pointconnections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.

Ethernet ringprotection switching

protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.

Ethernet virtualprivate LAN service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a sharedbridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.

Ethernet virtualprivate line

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over sharedbandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.

Ethernet-tree An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet VirtualConnection.

ETS European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EuropeanTelecommunicationsStandards Institute

A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.

EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line

EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service

excess burst size A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, thetraffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameterused to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet sizewhen the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parametermust be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than themaximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. Theprotection switching is not really performed.

expansion Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables,expanding the capacity of the storage system.

expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services thatdemand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EFtraffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCPvalue of EF PHB is "101110".

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

Page 228: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

B.3 F-JThis section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.

F

failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required functionto be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now beendetected.

fast Ethernet Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 timesfaster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and soon. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the followingthree types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core opticalfibers).

fast link pulse The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.

FD See frequency diversity

FDI See forward defect indication

FE See fast Ethernet

FEC See forward error correction

FFD fast failure detection

fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and forconnections between subracks or inside a subrack.

field programmablegate array

A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as thePAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but alsoovercomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of thelimited number of gate arrays.

FIFO See First in First out

File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computerson the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be anFTP client and the other an FTP server.

First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.

Forced switch For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unlessan equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on theprotection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.

forward defectindication

Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of theLSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of thedefect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affectedhigher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.

forward errorcorrection

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload atthe transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated duringtransmission are corrected at the receive end.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

Page 229: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Forwarding plane Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and canbe used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.

FPGA See field programmable gate array

fragment Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units.

Fragmentation Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network mediumthat cannot support the original size of the packet.

frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame lengthis represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-specified by the sending and receiving parties.

frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certainfrequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is thenperformed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.

FTP See File Transfer Protocol

full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in bothdirections, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-linetelephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heardat the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road withone lane for each direction.

G

gateway networkelement

A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer andthe NM application layer

GE See gigabit Ethernet

generic framingprocedure

A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has beenstandardized by ITU-T SG15.

generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This isto adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream routerto avoid packet discarding and congestion.

GFP See generic framing procedure

gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not supportcoaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. IfGigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causingthe length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.

Global PositioningSystem

A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, andtiming services to worldwide users.

GNE See gateway network element

GPS See Global Positioning System

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

Page 230: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options withgraphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.

GTS See generic traffic shaping

GUI See graphical user interface

guide rail Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.

H

HA See high availability

half-duplex A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in bothdirections, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a partybegins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, beforereplying.

HDLC See high level data link control

hierarchical quality ofservice

A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling accordingto the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and theadministrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidthcan be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.

high availability Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achievehigh availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takesover the system functions of the active module.

high level data linkcontrol

The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layerof the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame byadding a trailer and a header.

High Speed DownlinkPacket Access

A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirementfor asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables themaximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing theWCDMA network topology.

higher order path In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lowerorder path layers.

Hold priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicatesthe highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by thetunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.

hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop representsa small step on the route from one main computer to another.

hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables andstorage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. Whenthe faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services inthe faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entiresystem.

HP See higher order path

HQoS See hierarchical quality of service

HSB See hot standby

HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

Page 231: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

HSM hitless switch mode

HTB high tributary bus

hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supportsthe AM function.

I

ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol

IDU See indoor unit

IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force

IF See intermediate frequency

IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol

IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol managesand controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet GroupManagement Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.

IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM

indoor unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.

Inloop A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connectunit.

Institute of Electricaland ElectronicsEngineers

A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States butboasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RFsignal.

Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generateroutes.

Intermediate System toIntermediate Systemrouting protocol

A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forwarddatagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing.

internal spanning tree A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.

InternationalElectrotechnicalCommission

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards.

InternationalOrganization forStandardization

An international association that works to establish global standards for communicationsand information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely acceptedISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computersconnected by communications networks.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

Page 232: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

InternationalTelecommunicationUnion-TelecommunicationStandardization Sector

An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunicationstechnologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with aletter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. Forexample, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and opensystem communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.

Internet ControlMessage Protocol

A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction andother information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP softwareon one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See alsocommunications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).

Internet EngineeringTask Force

A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged withstudying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the InternetArchitecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groupsthat concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisherof the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.

Internet GroupManagement Protocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups amongthe TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establishand maintain multicast group memberships.

Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sentacross an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet deliveryservice. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. Theentire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the twofundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.

Internet protocolversion 6

A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specificationsand standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering TaskForce (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designedas the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 addresshas 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.

Internet protocolversion 6

A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specificationsand standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering TaskForce (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designedas the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 addresshas 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.

inverse multiplexingover ATM

The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higherbandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This isreferred to as an IMA group.

IP See Internet Protocol

IPV6 See Internet protocol version 6

IPv6 See Internet protocol version 6

IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol

ISO See International Organization for Standardization

IST See internal spanning tree

ITU-T See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication StandardizationSector

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

Page 233: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

J

Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control systeminstability.

B.4 K-OThis section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.

L

L2VPN See Layer 2 virtual private network

label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through labelswitching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based onnormal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.

label switching router Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR iscomposed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible forallocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating andremoving the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groupsreceived in the label forwarding table.

LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAG See link aggregation group

LAN See local area network

LAN See local area network

LAPS link access protocol-SDH

Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laserlight has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductorlaser as the light source.

layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmitsand distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is thesecond layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

Layer 2 virtual privatenetwork

A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packetswitched (IP/MPLS) network.

LB See loopback

LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme

LCT local craft terminal

line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals themaximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.

line rate forwarding The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.

Link AggregationControl Protocol

A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface toincrease bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE802.3ad.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

Page 234: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a linkaggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it werea single link.

link capacityadjustment scheme

LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides acontrol mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet thebandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member linksthat have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is theresponsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.

Link Protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link isa downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection,the link protection should be provided.

LMSP linear multiplex section protection

local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few squarekilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANsare generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few squarekilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANsare generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from beingswitched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has beenswitched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel tothe working channel.

LOF See Loss Of Frame

LOM loss of multiframe

loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that thesignal or message can be analyzed for errors.

LOP See loss of pointer

LOS See Loss Of Signal

Loss Of Frame A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overheadindicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitorthe performance of the PHY layer.

loss of pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in thePHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start ofcell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.

Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the receivedsignal.

LP lower order path

LPT link-state pass through

LSP See label switched path

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

Page 235: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

LSR See label switching router

M

MA See maintenance association

MAC See media access control

MAC See media access control

MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer

main topology A interface that displays the connection relationships of NEs on the NMS (screendisplay). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network,the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well asthe basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessedhere.

maintenanceassociation

That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, theconnectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of MaintenanceEntities.

maintenanceassociation end point

A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a ServiceInstance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is anend point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate MaintenanceEntity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.

maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. Thedevices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.

maintenance point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.

managementinformation base

A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. Itcomprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such asrouters and switches) in a network.

manual switch Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition existson other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switchcommand is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.

maximum transmissionunit

The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes onEthernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining thesize of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmittedacross networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the onethat all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networksinvolved.

MBS maximum burst size

MCF See message communication function

MD See maintenance domain

MDI See medium dependent interface

Mean Time BetweenFailures

The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measureof the reliability of the system.

Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

Page 236: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of thedata link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connectingthe physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocolchecks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain controlinformation is added to the data, and then the data and the control information aretransmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MACprotocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmittedcorrectly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the controlinformation is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of thedata link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connectingthe physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocolchecks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain controlinformation is added to the data, and then the data and the control information aretransmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MACprotocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmittedcorrectly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the controlinformation is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

medium dependentinterface

The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the mediatransmission.

MEP See maintenance association end point

MEP maintenance end point

messagecommunicationfunction

The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of managementinformation with their prs.

MIB See management information base

MIP maintenance intermediate point

mounting ear A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements orcomponents.

MP See maintenance point

MPID maintenance point identification

MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching

MPLS L2VPN The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. Inthis case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs ofdifferent media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.

MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of faultdetection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM andrelevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CR-LSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs.In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.

MPLS TE See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

Page 237: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

MPLS TE tunnel In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported throughmultiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a groupof LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has twoidentifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquelydefine the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE orFILTER_SPEC object.

MS See multiplex section

MSP See multiplex section protection

MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR See Mean Time To Repair

MTU See maximum transmission unit

Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. Thedestination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP addressranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicastgroup rather than a host.

Multiple SpanningTree Protocol

Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using analgorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmedas a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoidedin the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs andmultiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwardedin a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.

multiplex section The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.

multiplex sectionprotection

A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between andincluding two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a"protection" channel.

Multiprotocol LabelSwitching

A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different linklayers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis ofIP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability ofnetworks, and is beneficial to routing.

multiprotocol labelswitching trafficengineering

N/A

N

N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protectionchannel.

NE See network element

NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage thetelecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage andmaintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

Page 238: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. OneNE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board whichmanages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCCboard.

Network ManagementSystem

A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.

network service accesspoint

A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer canaccess OSI network services.

network to networkinterface

An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.

next hop The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a networkon its journey to its final destination.

NLP normal link pulse

NMS See Network Management System

NNI See network to network interface

node A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame,one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands forone frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.

Node Protection A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able toprotect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to thePLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able toprotect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to thePLR.

non-gateway networkelement

A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must betransferred by the gateway network element application layer.

non-GNE See non-gateway network element

NSAP See network service access point

NSF not stop forwarding

O

OAM See operation, administration and maintenance

ODF See optical distribution frame

ODU See outdoor unit

OM Operation and maintenance

One-to-One Backup A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protectedtunnel at a PLR.

open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra'salgorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. Alink state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routersin the area.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

Page 239: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Open SystemsInterconnection

A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made bydifferent vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven differentcategories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message sourceand destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.

operation,administration andmaintenance

A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in anoperational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriberaccess network to users/subscribers.

optic fiber connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couplethe optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. Aconnector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source(or a detector).+

optical distributionframe

A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.

orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers ormaintenance engineers of different stations.

OSI See Open Systems Interconnection

OSPF See open shortest path first

outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequencyconversion and amplification for RF signals.

Outloop A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port withoutchanging the structure of the signals.

Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

B.5 P-TThis section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.

P

packet switchednetwork

A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.

Packing case A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.

Path A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left endof a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path isa certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in thenetwork management system, a user can test the performance of a network path betweena device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packetloss ratio or other aspects.

PBS See peak burst size

PCB See printed circuit board

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

Page 240: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

PCI bus PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bitfor interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.

PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy

PDU See protocol data unit

PE See provider edge

peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burstIP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. Thisparameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be notless than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

peak information rate A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committedinformation rate.

penultimate hoppopping

Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLSenabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS taggedpacket is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to anadjacent Label Edge Router (LER).

per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hopbehaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network shouldselect the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETFdefines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).

PHB See per-hop behavior

PHP See penultimate hop popping

PIR See peak information rate

PLA physical link aggregation

plesiochronous digitalhierarchy

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimumrate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.

Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulatesdata packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.

polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed orrotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave isperpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called verticallypolarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to theplane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if thetip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, thiselectromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.

Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which suppliespower for the subracks in the cabinet.

PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol

PQ See priority queue

PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence

PRC primary reference clock

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

Page 241: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic componentsusing conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated ontoa non-conductive substrate.

priority queue An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following threeoperations: (1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associatedpriority (2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority,and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") (3) PeekAtNext(optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it

protection groundcable

A cable which connects the equipment and the protection ground bar. Usually, one halfof the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.

Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

protocol data unit It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model.

provider edge A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE isresponsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, andexchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, aPE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network andthe public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.

pseudo random binarysequence

A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of thevalues of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.

pseudo wire An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is establishedand maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW ismaintained by the two end PEs of a PW.

pseudo wire emulationedge-to-edge

A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributesof a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet SwitchedNetwork (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time DivisionMultiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the realsituation.

PSN See packet switched network

PTN packet transport network

PW See pseudo wire

PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge

Q

QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tagof the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN.The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of thecarrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.

QoS See quality of service

QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying

quadrature phase shiftkeying

A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation andthe phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth periodor 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots areevenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232

Page 242: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet lossratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of thetransmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of aservice provider to meet the demands of users.

R

radio frequency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create anelectromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The ACwith frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classifiedinto such high-frequency current.

radio networkcontroller

A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of theradio resources.

random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet accordingto the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronizationresulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented.

Rapid Spanning TreeProtocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning treeconvergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible withthe STP protocol.

RDI See remote defect indication

received signal level The signal level at a receiver input terminal.

Received SignalStrength Indicator

The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in thereceiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDDwithin a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna

Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average receivedpower at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).

RED See random early detection

Reed-Solomon-Code A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction oferrors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmissionerrors at the receiver site.

REI See remote error indication

remote defectindication

A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminaldetects specific defects in the incoming signal.

remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There aretwo types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstreamLTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) issent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte.

Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to theoperation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control ofthe IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sourcessuch as InterNIC.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

Page 243: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Resource ReservationProtocol

The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and isused to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transportlayer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network controlprotocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).

reverse pressure A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit endtransmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit endto slow down the transmission rate.

RF See radio frequency

RFC See Request For Comments

RIP See Routing Information Protocol

RMON remote network monitoring

RMON remote network monitoring

RNC See radio network controller

Root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-levelalarms always accompany a root alarm.

route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.

route table A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destinationaddress, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM tothe designated account according to the information set in the route table.

Routing InformationProtocol

A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a routebased on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vectorprotocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and isknown to waste bandwidth.

routing table A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routersregularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on thedestination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--inhops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.

RSL See received signal level

RSSI See Received Signal Strength Indicator

RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol

RTN radio transmission node

S

SD See space diversity

SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy

SEMF See synchronous equipment management function

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

Page 244: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies theforwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLAmay include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreementas a whole or partially.

Service LevelAgreement *

A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between serviceprovider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information aboutmeasuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operatingand support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider andcustomer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved thedocumented target measure.

SES See severely errored second

Setup Priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicatesthe highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt theresources required by other backup tunnels.

severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio ≥ X 10-3 or at least one defect. Timeinterval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratiogreater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction).

SF See signal fail

SFP See small form-factor pluggable

side trough The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix thecabinet.

signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscribersignal cable.

signal fail A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defectcondition (non-degrade defect) is active.

signal to noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at agiven point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio andis usually expressed in dB (Decibel).

Simple NetworkManagement Protocol

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modifythe management information of a network element. This protocol ensures thetransmission of management information between any two points. The pollingmechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, whichcan be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on thenetwork and report these activities to the network console workstation. Controlinformation about each device is maintained by a management information block.

simplex Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can betransmitted in either direction, but not simultaneously, between two points.

SLA See service level agreement

SLA* See Service Level Agreement *

Slicing To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.

small form-factorpluggable

A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.

SNC See subnetwork connection

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

Page 245: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

SNCP See subnetwork connection protection

SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR See signal to noise ratio

space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distanceto transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the twosignals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.

Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundantnetwork to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prunea loop network into a loop-free tree network.

SSM See Synchronization Status Message

static virtual circuit Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPNinformation by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.

Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can betransmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only toactive input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devicesto be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.

STM See Synchronous Transport Module

STM-1 See synchronous transport mode-1

STM-N See synchronous transport module of order N

STP See Spanning Tree Protocol

sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group ofnetwork management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected orcorrelated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clocksubnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, asub-network is used to contain the equipment located in adjacent regions and closelyrelated with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topologicalview. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning canbetter the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved,on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipmentunder their management.

subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets aredestined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,server or router and is matched with the IP address.

subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by theassociation of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.

subnetwork connectionprotection

A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protectionsubnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performancefalls below a required level.

SVC See static virtual circuit

switch To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. Thisbehavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

Page 246: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

Synchronization StatusMessage

A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clockinformation through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on theirclocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward thesynchronization information to downstream nodes.

synchronous digitalhierarchy

A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines thetransmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speedcounterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitablefor the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it usessynchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

synchronousequipmentmanagement function

The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms intoobject-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.

synchronous transportmode-1

Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s.

SynchronousTransport Module

An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in theSDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fieldsorganized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitablyconditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronizedto the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Highercapacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacitiesfor N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.

synchronous transportmodule of order N

A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH.See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64.

T

tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length,packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such asTCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced,thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets aredropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.

Tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded whenthe queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-widesynchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.

TCI tag control information

TCP See Transmission Control Protocol

TDM See time division multiplexing

TE See traffic engineering

TEDB See traffic engineering database

TelecommunicationManagement Network

A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communicationsnetwork. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networksand services.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

Page 247: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

TIM trace identifier mismatch

time divisionmultiplexing

A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3, ...), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross timeslots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmittedover one channel.

time to live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in thenetwork. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.

TMN See Telecommunication Management Network

ToS priority A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.

TPS See tributary protection switch

traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the loadof the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic managementparameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize theutilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused byunbalanced loads.

traffic engineeringdatabase

TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to knowthe features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which usesthe link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS containsome TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reservedbandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are ratherimportant. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area andgenerates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLSTE network.

Traffic shaping It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guaranteethe performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of trafficin the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layerdevices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.

Transmission ControlProtocol

The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets tobe sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the completemessages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliablein the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer inthe ISO/OSI reference model.

tributary protectionswitch

Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended toprotect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.

trTCM See two rate three color marker

TTL See time to live

TU tributary unit

Tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnelensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnelis an MPLS tunnel.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

Page 248: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

two rate three colormarker

The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, PeakInformation Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associatedburst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds thePIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds ordoesn't exceed the CIR.

B.6 U-ZThis section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

U

U-VLAN A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN.Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.

UAS unavailable second

UBR See unspecified bit rate

UDP See User Datagram Protocol

underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.

UNI See user network interface

unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.

unspecified bit rate No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is idealfor the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded,and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.

upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(NetworkManagement system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data storedat the NMS side.

User DatagramProtocol

A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send adatagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IPto deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliableconnectionless packet delivery service. Therefore, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet isreceived.

user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (forexample, ATM switches).

V

V-UNI See virtual user-network interface

variable bit rate One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike apermanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidthand is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.

VBR See variable bit rate

VC See virtual container

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

Page 249: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

VCC See virtual channel connection

VCG See virtual concatenation group

VCI See virtual channel identifier

VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internalport of a data service processing board

virtual channelconnection

The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. Alogical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection.

virtual channelidentifier

A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used toidentify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches onits way to its destination.

virtual concatenationgroup

A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the samevirtual concatenation link

virtual container The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consistsof information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a blockframe structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.

virtual local areanetwork

A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physicalnetwork segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associatedwith switched Ethernet.

virtual path identifier The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to whichvirtual path the cell belongs.

virtual private LANservice

A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLSenables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through theMAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.

virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network viaconnections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.

virtual route forward VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actualrouting device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs,performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances onthe device.

virtual user-networkinterface

A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform serviceclassification and traffic control in HQoS.

VLAN See virtual local area network

voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voiceinformation over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital formin discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of thepublic switched telephone network (PSTN).

VoIP See voice over IP

VPI See virtual path identifier

VPLS See virtual private LAN service

VPN See virtual private network

VRF See virtual route forward

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

Page 250: RTN 950 Commissioning Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_01)

W

wait to restore The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.

WAN See wide area network

Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NEmanagement layer of the transport network

weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. Thisscheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, accordingto their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priorityqueues can be scheduled.

weighted random earlydetection

A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCPsynchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-prioritypacket when calculating the packet loss ratio.

weighted round Robin N/A

WFQ See weighted fair queuing

wide area network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which arephysically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as aprovince, a state or even a country.

winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.

WRED See weighted random early detection

WRR See weighted round Robin

WTR See wait to restore

X

XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission SystemCommissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241